Precast Technical Manual. MeadowBurke

Transcription

1 Precast Technical Manual MeadowBurke

2

3 Table of Contents Product Safety Considerations...4 Product Coatings and Finishes...5 Burke Lift...13 Burke Lift Technical Information...14 The Edge Lift Advantage...15 The Face Lift Advantage...16 Rapid Lift System...17 Rapid Lift Technical Information...18 Rapid Lift System Anchors...9 Double Tee Anchor...51 Utility Lifting System...79 V-Anchor Lifting System Technical Information...80 Coil Lifting Inserts...85 Coil Lifting Insert Technical Information...86 Rapid-Lok Connection Plate System The Primary Assembly Components...10 Rapid-Lok Placement vs. Load Chart Erector Connector Systems MB Erector Connector Insert and Concrete Failures...7 Rapid Lift System Ring Clutches...5 Rapid Lift System Recess Members & Accessories..55 MB DogBone Lifting System...61 MB DogBone System Technical Information...6 MB DogBone System Anchors...61 MB DogBone System Lifting Hardware...7 MB DogBone System Recess Formers...75 MB DogBone System Accessories...78 Hook-Lift Lifting System Recess Accessories...83 MB Cable Lift Loop + Plus System...84 Coil Lifting Inserts...87 Coil Lifting Insert Accessories...94 Rapid-Lok Stud Location with Bearing Point Reference Stud Extender MB Expansion Joint Engineered Lifting Systems Safety Rapid-Lok Coil Lifting Hook-Lift Erector Connecttor Halfen Anchoring System Burke Barrier Reflector Connector...4 Welded Wire Girders for Composite Panels and Slabs...9 Meadow Burke NC Threaded Inserts and Accessories Prestress Products Prestress Chucks...14 Prestress Jacks Precast Chemicals Concrete Repair Products Bracing Hardware Brace Load Table Bracing Guidelines Bracing Table Legend Slotted Inserts...5 Welded Wire Girders for Composite Panels Precast Miscellaneous Products Prestress Strand Hold Downs Prestress Products Prestress Working Parts Form Release Agents Epoxy Products Meadow Burke Braces Coil Inserts Anchor Systems Brace Badger Product Index Bracing Hardware Chemicals Prestress NC Threads Wire Girders Halfen

4 Product Safety Considerations Meadow Burke guarantees the products it manufactures when used by qualified, experienced and properly supervised workmen adhering to the safety factor standards detailed below. Misuse, misapplication or lack of proper supervision and/or inspection can result in serious accidents. If you have unusual applications or are uncertain about a product application, contact your Meadow Burke Service Center for clarification and carefully field test the application prior to general use. When using a Meadow Burke product take time to carefully consider the application, applied loads, required safety factors, safe working loads and all field conditions to ensure complete safety of all persons involved. PRODUCT SAFETY FACTORS Safety factors are determined by the degree of risk involved in the use of the product and are established by the American Concrete Institute (ACI), Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Safety factors specific to precast concrete construction are shown in the following table, other saftey factors may be shown. Safety Factor 5 to 1 4 to 1 3 to to 1 Product Intended Use Reusable Hardware for lifting and handling Inserts/Anchors for lifting and handling Permanent connections Hold Downs for prestressing strands All products displayed in this publication have the applicable safety factor used to derive their safe working loads. This does not relieve the user of the responsibility to carefully calculate and determine the actual loads that will be applied in a specific product application. If the user determines that a safety factor differs from what is printed in this publication is needed, the following equation may be used to raise or lower a safe working load: Adjusted Safe Work Load = Published Safe Working Load (Published Safety Factor) (New Required Safety Factor) If there are any doubts, questions or concerns about safe working loads and/or safety factors, contact your Meadow Burke Service Center. WELDING CONSIDERATIONS Meadow Burke cannot control field conditions or field workmanship; therefore it cannot guarantee any Meadow Burke product that has been altered in any way after it has left the manufacturing facility. This includes welding, bending, filing, etc. Never weld to a casting unless authorized by a qualified engineer. Welding to a casting can cause localized embrittlement that greatly reduces the load-carrying capacity of the casting. Tack welding to wire products can have the same effect. WORN WORKING PARTS All construction-related working parts are subject to wear, misuse, overloading, corrosion, alteration, etc. which may affect the performance of the product. Therefore, all working parts must be regularly inspected to determine if the product can remain in service. The frequency of inspection is based on how often the product is used, period of use and the environment in which it is used. PRODUCT DESIGN AND SAFE WORKING LOAD CHANGES As a manufacturer of quality concrete accessories, Meadow Burke reserves the right to change product designs and/or product safe working load ratings at any time without prior notice to prospective users. Any such changes will only be made to improve the product or to increase product safety. 4

5 Product and Coating Finishes Safety Products manufactured by Meadow Burke can be supplied in several different coatings or finishes to meet specific corrosion resistance requirements. Note that if no coating or finish is specified when placing an order, the product will be supplied with the standard plain finish. AVAILABLE FINISHES AND COATINGS PLAIN Unprotected steel sometimes referred to as black, basic or raw steel. It will corrode or rust when exposed to the elements. ELECTRO-PLATE A bright shiny or sometimes dull finish generally to inch thick zinc coating. The degree of corrosion protection will vary based on the severity of the environment in which it is used. Meadow Burke electro-plated products comply with the ASTM B-633 standard. ASTM B-633 ELECTRO-PLATE COATING OF ZINC ON STEEL Service Condition Exposure Coating Thickness SC-4 SC-3 SC- SC-1 Very Severe Severe Moderate Mild inch inch inch inch HOT DIP GALVANIZE Semi-bright to very dull finish. It is a much heavier coating than electro-plate. Hot dip galvanize (HDG) provides a higher degree of corrosion resistance than electro-plate, but is not suitable for threaded or tight-fitting products. Meadow Burke hot dip galvanized protected products comply with ASTM A-3 or ASTM A-153. ASTM A-3 Used for products that are fabricated from rolled, pressed, punched and forged steel shapes, plate, bar, wire or strips 0.5 inch thick and heavier. Zinc finish thickness will vary from 0.00 to inch thick. ASTM A-3 HOT DIP GALVANIZE ON IRON AND STEEL Product Type Product Thickness Coating Thickness Wire Wire Wire Steel or Plate Steel or Plate Steel or Plate 0.14 to dia to 0.49 dia dia. or larger to 0.06 thick to 0.4 thick 0.5 or thicker 0.00 inch inch inch 0.00 inch inch inch ASTM A-153 A coating process for iron and steel products that utilizes a spinning technique to remove excess zinc. Bolts may be processed under this ASTM specification. Coating will vary in thickness from 0.00 to inch depending on the class specified by the user. ASTM A-153 HOT DIP GALVANIZE ON IRON AND STEEL HARDWARE Product Type Class of Protection Coating Thickness Castings 3/16 and over thickness and over 15" Length Under 3/16 thickness and over 15" Length Any thickness and 15" and under Length A B1 B B inch inch inch 0.00 inch WARNING: Products manufactured from high carbon steel that is electro-plated or hot dip galvanized must be properly heat treated to minimize embrittlement. Failure to properly heat-treat these products may cause a compromise of their safe working loads and result in a premature failure of the product. 5

6 Product Coatings and Finishes (cont.) EPOXY COATING A shiny epoxy coating applied to a finished product utilizing an electrostatic or fluidized bed. The coating thickness will vary from to 0.0 inch. Epoxy coating is a very effective protection from hostile environments such as around or over salt water and chemically contaminated areas. STAINLESS STEEL Stainless steel offers high corrosion resistance in any environment. Type 304 stainless steel is generally used (unless otherwise specified) by Meadow Burke. It is non-magnetic and can be painted with no special preparation. CAUTION: Corrosion may occur on exposed metal products when architectural precast members are etched or acid washed. The amount of corrosion will be dependent on the acidity of the wash and/or the type of chemicals used. Embrittlement Information Carbon steels, cold-worked steels and heat treated steels are susceptible to embrittlement in both electro-plating and hot dip galvanizing operations. A) Any severely cold-worked steel must be stress-relieved from strain aging by baking prior to electroplating or hot dip galvanizing. B) Any steel with significant high strength or high carbon content is susceptible to hydrogen embrittlement during electro-plating or hot dip galvanizing. It must be baked after the coating is applied to drive out excessive hydrogen. WARNING: Products manufactured from high carbon steel that is electro-plated or hot dip galvanized must be properly heat treated to minimize embrittlement. Failure to properly heat treat these products may cause a compromise of their safe working loads and result in a premature failure of the product. Applicable ASTM documents: ASTM A-143 ASTM A-153 ASTM A-165 ASTM B-633 Safe Guarding Against Embrittlement Zinc Coating (hot dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware Electro-Deposited Coatings of Cadmium on Steel Electro-Deposited Coatings of Zinc Example Coating Specifications: Electro-Plate Electro-Plate to ASTM B-633 Specification. Service Condition SC-4. Provide embrittlement relief, if necessary. Hot Dip Galvanize Hot Dip Galvanize to ASTM A-153, Class A. Provide embrittlement relief, if necessary. 6

7 Safety and Technical Safety Failure of an insert/anchor or the concrete can occur in a variety of ways; such as concrete shear cone failure, insert mechanical failure, coil penetration failure and edge lifting failures. CONCRETE SHEAR CONE FAILURE The concrete shear cone is the area of concrete around the insert/anchor that fails due to the concrete s inability to contain the stresses of the applied load. The approximation of break strength in uncracked concrete assuming a full shear cone is given by the following formula for a single anchor: A Nc N cb = ψ ed,n ψ c,n ψ cp,n N A b (D-4) Nco Where A Nco = 9h ef (D-6) A Nc 1.5h ef N b = k c λ f c h ef 1.5 ' (D-7) N b = 16λ f c h ef 5/3 ' (D-8) ψ c,n = 1.5 for cast-in anchors 1.5h ef ψ cp,n = 1.0 c a, min ψ ed,n = h ef (D-) (D-11) 1.5h ef 1.5h ef k c = 4 λ = 1.0 for Normal Weight Concrete, 150 pcf Plan A Nc = ( x 1.5h ef ) x ( x 1.5h ef ) = 9h ef Figure RD.5..1 h ef = effective depth of the anchor, use equation D-7 for anchors less than 11" and equation D-8 for anchors greater than or equal to 11" The equation above is the ultimate pullout strength of an anchor in tension in uncracked concrete as given by ACI Appendix D. Meadow Burke does not recommend the use of LRFD design methodology when designing anchors for lifting and forming. LRFD design methodology is intended for in-service conditions only and not for temporary conditions such as lifting, forming and bracing. The end-user of the product will under design the lifting system using this method while over design a forming system. It is recommended that the above pullout strength be reduced by the desired safety factor as recommended by page of this catalog. CONDITIONS AFFECTING SHEAR CONE CAPACITIES: 1. A shear cone is assumed to radiate a 35º cone. Field experience indicates that the cone may actually radiate as much as a 0º cone, which would increase the required corner distance to *Length of insert.. Sustained vibrations will reduce N cb by thirty percent (30%). 3. N cb decreases with decreasing unit weight of the concrete. For light weight concrete, 0 psf or less, λ = For cracked concrete conditions, reduce N cb by 0%. 7

8 Insert and Concrete Failures (cont.) INSERT/ANCHOR MECHANICAL FAILURES Insert and anchor safe working loads (SWL) displayed in this publication are based on the mechanical properties of the product. Generally, it is the capacity of the insert wire or anchor body that determines the mechanical capacity. The user of Meadow Burke products must always check to ensure that enough concrete cover is available to provide a full shear cone and compare the mechanical strength of the insert/anchor to the available concrete shear cone. The lesser of the two values will determine the safe working load of that specific application. inches Nominal Diameter mm Wire Grade MHC LC LC MHC LC LC LC LC MHC LC TYPICAL WIRE SIZES AND STRENGTHS AISI & SAE Number C1035 C1008 C1018 C1035 C1018 C1008 C10 C1008 C1035 C1008 Approx. M Yield Tension lbs. kn Approx. M Ult. Tension lbs kn Approx. M Shear lbs kn Wire displayed above and all wire used by Meadow Burke in the fabrication of inserts comply with ASTM-1064 standards, with a minimum yield strength from 70 ksi. MINIMUM COIL BOLT PENETRATION FAILURES The most common type of insert failure is caused by the lack of sufficient bolt penetration through the coil of the insert. Under applied load, inadequate bolt penetration of the insert coil will cause the upper part of the coil to unwind and pull out of the insert. This is commonly referred to as the corkscrew effect. Minimum Coil Penetration Setback Typically 1/" 8

9 Insert and Concrete Failures (cont.) Safety COIL BOLT CONSIDERATIONS 1. Failure to properly tighten a coil bolt can result in the inability of the coil bolt to fully penetrate the coil of the insert.. Excessive insert setback in the concrete can result in the inability of the coil bolt to fully penetrate the coil of the insert. 3. Worn threads on a coil bolt will render the bolt ineffective and will result in inadequate thread engagement. 4. A coil bolt of inadequate length to fully penetrate the insert coil will produce a corkscrew type of failure. The insert coil cannot carry the required load when only partially engaged. 5. Reference the Minimum Coil Penetration Table on page 90. IMPORTANT: In precast concrete plant operations, coil bolts should be periodically inspected and replaced if signs of wear or bending are present. Worn or bent bolts should be immediately discarded. Never use a worn or bent bolt for any purpose and never attempt to straighten a bent bolt. EDGE LIFTING FAILURES When an insert/anchor is located in the edge of a concrete panel for the purpose of lifting and handling of the panel, the concrete on the topside of the insert/anchor will carry the entire applied load unless special provisions are implemented. The upward force on an insert, from the bolt and compressive force from the lifting plate, combine to quickly overload the concrete on the topside of the insert/anchor. The loss of the concrete above the insert/anchor can result in the insert breaking and loss of the panel. One means of increasing edge lift capacity is to strengthen the concrete over the insert with shear bars or stirrup assemblies. This process will reinforce the concrete, preventing total loss of the concrete and allow the insert/anchor to remain in the panel. Always use the proper style and capacity insert/anchor for edge lifting. Never use a two-strut insert. A properly selected insert/anchor will not break if the concrete above it fails. This will allow the panel to be positioned with only minor patching required. LIFTING HARDWARE CONSIDERATIONS All lifting hardware is subject to wear, abuse, bending, overloading, alterations and corrosion. The user of these products must continually inspect the product to determine its usable condition. If the product shows any of the problems noted above or is not in good working condition, the product should be discarded or returned to Meadow Burke for repair and/or service. Based on how often the product is used, period of use and the environment in which it is used must determine the frequency of inspections. 9

10 Insert and Concrete Failures (cont.) LIFTING PLATES When using lifting plates in conjunction with cast-in-place inserts, a combination of forces with small lever arms become factors with which to be concerned. Reference the sketches shown below. Dimension d is an assumed constant subject to the location of R, the resultant force exerted by the reaction of the plate on the concrete. P T P T LP-11 LP-0 e H LP- LP-44 e H SHEAR FORCE SHEAR FORCE d/ d R SWIVEL PLATE APPLICATION d/ d R LIFT PLATE APPLICATION V V Lifting Plates Considerations: 1. If the lifting plate is loosely tightened, the location of R will be at the extreme edge/corner of the plate and d becomes plate width divided by.. If the lifting plate is properly tightened down with the attachment bolt, the generally accepted stress pattern on the plate will be triangular or trapezoidal. 3. During initial and low loads the R force moves from the toe of the plate towards the center of the plate. As the load increases, the plate attempts to flex. The maximum movement is most likely to the midpoint of the plate, between the bolt centerline and the toe of the plate. Taking a conservative approach, d divided by is the theoretical location of the R force, thus resulting in a higher load to be added to the vertical component load. 4. Using basic equations, a pair of force couples must be equal to zero: H(e) = V(d/) and V = (e/d)h V = vertical force on the insert. H = horizontal force on the lifting plate. VALUES FOR (e/d) Type of Bolt Diameter Lifting Plate mm. LP-11 3/4 19 LP LP LP-0 1-1/4 31 LP-0 1-1/ 38 LP- 3/4 19 LP- 1 5 LP LP /4 31 LP / 38 ( ) e d Example: If Meadow Burke Lift Plate Swivel (LP11), 1 diameter lifting plate is pulled at an angle producing 3000 lbs. vertical load and 3000 lbs. horizontal load, then applying the above information: V = ( e ) H = 0.8 (3000) = 400 lbs. additional load on the insert due to the horizontal force d component. Total Applied Load = L A = Vertical component load + ( e ) H d L A = = 5400 lbs. Total Tension Load Must use an insert with a SWL greater than 5400 lbs. 10

11 Insert and Concrete Failures (cont.) Safety Lifting plate example calculation: Values for (e/d) H-Reference Table on page 8. If a 1 diameter Meadow Burke Swivel Lift Plate (6440) is pulled at an angle producing 3,000 lbs. vertical load and 3,000 lbs. horizontal load, then the application of the information on the previous page would be as such: V = (e/d)h = 0.80 x 3,000 =,400 lbs. additional load on the insert due to the horizontal force component. Total applied load = L A L A = vertical component load + (e/d)h L A = 3,000 +,400 lbs. L A = 5,400 lbs. total tension load. In this example, an insert with a safe working load greater than 5,400 lbs. must be used. INCLINED SLINGS When rigging is selected where the sling lines are inclined, it is important to measure the incline angle α (alpha). The angle will cause an increase in the anchor loading due to the horizontal force components. Reference the sketched examples: 1. The incline angle is 90 and from the table below, the load factor is 1.0. Therefore, F1 load = 1.0 x weight of the concrete element divided by.. The incline angle is 45 and from the table below, the load factor is 1.4. Therefore, F1 load = 1.4 x weight of the concrete element divided by. 3. The incline angle is 60 and from the table below, the load factor is Therefore, F1 load = 1.16 x weight of the concrete element divided by. Sling Angle Load Factor 90º 1.00 SLING ANGLE LOAD FACTORS 75º º º º.00 F1 F F1 W F F1 W F α α α α = 90º #1-90º Sling Angle α = 45º α = 60º # - 45º Sling Angle #3-60º Sling Angle 11

12 Insert and Concrete Failures (cont.) Example Dual Inclined Slings Calculations: Determine the anchor load, anchor size and concrete psi required for a rectangular concrete beam 10 deep, 30 wide and 4 long. The beam has form adhesion at the bottom surface only and a sling incline angle of 45. Concrete dead weight = 10 / x 30 / x 4 x 150 lbs. = 7,500 lbs. Form adhesion = 10 / x 4 x 5 lbs. = 500 lbs. Combined load (CL) = 8,000 lbs. Now apply the load factor for the 45 inclined sling angle and realizing that F1 = F = CL/ then; F1 = 8,000/ x 1.4 = 5,680 lbs. per anchor. To adequately lift and handle, the example beam would require an anchor like the 4-ton x 5-1/ long DogBone Anchor rated at 6,000 lbs. safe working load in,500 psi concrete. DUAL INCLINED SLINGS EXAMPLE FOUR INCLINED SLINGS EXAMPLE F1 F Loose Tight Loose 45º 60º Tight Example Four Inclined Slings Attached at Slab Corners Calculations: When four fixed length slings are used to lift and handle a concrete element, often one of the slings will be longer than the rest. This will force two of the embedded anchors to carry the total load and the other two anchors to do little more than keep the slab balanced. Determine the anchor load, anchor size and concrete psi required for a slab x 10 x 16 using a sling incline angle of 60 and having form adhesion at the bottom surface only. Concrete dead weight = x 10 x 16 / x 150 = 4,000 lbs. Form adhesion (concrete form) = x 10 x 0 lbs. =,400 lbs. Combined load (CL) = 6,400 lbs. F1 = 6,400/ (only two anchors working) x 1.16 per anchor = 15,3 lbs. per anchor To adequately lift and handle, the example slab would require an anchor like the 8-ton x 13-3/8 long DogBone Anchor rated at 16,000 lbs. safe working load in 1,500 psi concrete.

13 Burke Lift Engineered Lifting Systems After more than three years of development and testing by Burke Engineering, the Burke Lift system is changing face and edge lifting. This unique overall design may just be the most innovative lifting product in more than 30 years. 13

14 One Ring Clutch, One Void Former, One Anchor After more than three years of development and testing by Burke Engineering, the Burke Lift system is changing face and edge lifting. This unique overall design may just be the most innovative lifting product in more than 30 years. The cutting edge system greatly simplifies engineering, inventory requirements, lifting, and it completely eliminates clutch changeover and the spalling of surrounding concrete. The Lifting Innovation One ring clutch One void former for all anchors One edge lift erection anchor One style of face lift anchor, available in eight heights Our patented clutch redirects the shear force distribution opposite of existing lifting systems. Among the Burke Lift s features is a one-clutch system, which allows for the elimination of switching between 4/5-ton and 8/10-ton clutches. The patent pending clutch design forces the clutch to bear into the Burke Lift Anchor rather than the concrete. It is equipped with one style face lift anchor in eight heights for panel thickness from 5" to " allowing for a shear safe working load in thinner panels. Burke Lift functions in thin panels of 5" for face lift anchors as well as edge lift anchors. The Burke Lift Advantage Burke Lift simplifies traditional 4, 5, 8 and 10-ton applications. It also provides greater capacity than the 6-ton forged anchor The system is designed for face and edge lifts, and maintains a 10-ton mechanical strength in ALL applications The one clutch system eliminates the need to switch between 4/5 ton and 8/10 clutches The Burke Lift clutch bears into the anchor rather than the concrete on edge lifting Face lift anchors accommodate panel thickness of 5 to allowing for a shear safe working load in thinner panels Eliminates the need for additional anchor reinforcement Manufactured to Burke quality standards. Each clutch is traceable by serial number, and each anchor is traceable by batch code. EDGE LIFT ANCHORS BURKE LIFT VS RAPID LIFT Anchor Description Burke Lift Rapid Lift Burke Lift Rapid Lift Burke Lift 10-Ton Edge Lift Anchor 4-Ton Tech Erec w/sp 10-Ton Edge Lift Anchor 4-Ton Tech Erec w/sp 10-Ton Edge Lift Anchor Rapid Lift 8-Ton Tech Erec w/sp Wall Thickness 5" 5" 6" 6" 8" 8" Allowable Shear.66:1 S.F. 4,400 lbs 4,000 lbs 4,690 lbs 4,90 lbs 6,70 lbs 6,030 lbs Allowable Shear 4:1 S.F.,930 lbs,660 lbs 3,0 lbs,860 lbs 4,470 lbs 4,010 lbs Allowable Edge Tension 4:1 S.F. 6,810 lbs 4,730 lbs* 9,490 lbs 5,170 lbs* 14,80 lbs 7,690 lbs* Minimum Corner Distance " " " " " 18" Minimum Spacing 44" 4" 44" 4" 44" 36" Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi. * Loads shown are without tension bar. 14

15 THE EDGE LIFT ADVANTAGE One Edge Lift Anchor for Panels 5" + Thickness Made in the U.S.A. with American Steel Engineered Lifting Systems.5" The Burke Lift System Eliminates the Anchors Below RAPID LIFT EDGE-LIFT ANCHORS Tension Only Tension and Shear Tech Anchors 4-ton Spread Anchors 4-, 8-ton Forged Anchor 6-ton Shear Bar Required Tech Erection Anchors 4-, 8-ton Erection Anchors 4-, 8-ton Forged Anchor 6-ton Erection Head Two Hole 4-, 8-ton With Intergral Shear Plate Tech Erection Anchor w/ Shear Plate 4-, 8-ton Erection Anchor w/ Shear Plate 4-, 8-ton Forged Anchor 6-ton 15

16 THE FACE LIFT ADVANTAGE One Anchor, Eight Heights Made in the U.S.A. with American Steel Panel Thickness Anchor Height (A) Burke Lift Face Lift Allowable Tension Load 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) Rapid Lift Face Lift Allowable Tension Load 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) Overall Width (B) Material Thickness (C) 5" 4" 4,600,670 5, " 0.75" 6" 5" 6,000 3,590 8, " 0.75" 7" 6" 8,000 6, " 0.75" 8" 7" 9,50 10, " 0.75" 9" 8" 11,50 N/A 6.13" 0.75" 10" 9" 13,00 N/A 6.69" 0.75" 11" 10" 14,500 N/A 7.5" 0.75" " 11" 16,000, " 0.75" Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi. C A B 16

17 Rapid Lift System Engineered Lifting Rapid Systems Lift The Meadow Burke Rapid Lift System has proven itself to be a safe, trouble-free, quality precast lifting and handling system. It offers many advantages, such as a broad selection of anchors, easy installation and outstanding maneuverability to handle any precast application. 17

18 Rapid Lift Technical Information INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS NEW RING CLUTCH INVENTORY Generally inspect for overall appearance. Make sure there are no bent parts, welds or sign of excessive heating on any parts. Make sure ring clutches have stop pins and bushings. Make sure the ring clutch handle does not come out of the casting when rotated to the open position. Make sure product date stamps are 1978 or newer. INVENTORY RETURNED FROM JOB SITE OR OTHER SOURCES Generally inspect for overall appearance. Make sure there are no bent parts, welds or sign of excessive heating on any parts. A clutch handle that is slightly bent (15 or less) can be straightened cold. Make sure ring clutches have stop pins and bushings. Make sure the ring clutch handles do not come out of the casting when rotated to the open position. Make sure the lifting bail is not bent. Check lanyard for fraying. Make sure product date stamps are 1978 or newer. ADDITIONAL INSPECTIONS FOR CABLE BAIL CLUTCHES Check the wire rope for bends, kinks, loosing of outer layers in the free length, squeezing in the free length, squeezing in the support area, tuberculation, damage or wear of the rope or end connectors and excessive wire ruptures (4 ruptures in 3 diameters of the rope, 6 in 6 diameters, 16 in 30 diameters, etc). WHEN TO SCRAP RING CLUTCH/HANDLE If the bail is bent more than 10 or shows evidence of having been straightened more than once, scrap the unit. If a weld cannot be repaired, the unit should be scrapped. If the clutch itself is bent, the clutch must be destroyed. Scrap the handle if it is bent more than 15. CABLE BAIL CLUTCHES If the wire rope is compromised according to the inspection criteria listed above, it must be replaced. The replacement wire rope shall be of a similar or larger size as the original. It should be replaced, spliced, tested and certified for load equal to 4 times the rated load stamped on the clutch casting by a company specializing in wire rope replacement. INSTALLING AND REMOVING RECESSING MEMBERS PLASTIC RECESSING MEMBERS ASSEMBLY - To assemble the anchor and the Recessing Member, insert two rods or screwdrivers into the inside holes of the recessing member and scissor the rods to open the recess member to permit insertion of the anchor. RL

19 Rapid Lift Technical Information (cont.) Nailing to formwork Position the anchor/recessing member assembly in its assigned location and nail it to the formwork. The outside holes in the recessing member can be utilized for this purpose or a Holding Plate can be nailed to the formwork to support the assembly. Engineered Lifting Systems Holding Plate attachment The anchor/recessing member assembly may be attached in four different methods using the Holding Plate: nailed, as noted above, bolted, welded or taped. Bolting the unit to the formwork requires a properly placed hole to be drilled in the formwork. A L-Rod or bolt/wing nut assembly is inserted through the drilled hole to securely attach the anchor/recess assembly to the form. On a multi-use metal form, the Holding Plate can be tack welded in its proper position to hold the anchor/recessing member. Taping the holding plate can be accomplished using a good quality, commercial grade double back tape. Stripping To strip a plastic recessing member, insert two rods or screwdrivers into the two innermost holes of the recessing member. A scissoring motion of the rods will lift one side of the recessing member and it can then be extracted from the concrete. 19

20 Rapid Lift Technical Information (cont.) METAL RECESSING MEMBERS ASSEMBLY To assemble the anchor and metal recessing member, first fold the foam strip over the head of the anchor and then press the foamcovered head of the anchor into the recessing member slot. Insert the tapered end of the steel wedge into the top of the recessing member and through the eye of the anchor and wedge tightly. RL-55 RL-59 RL-57 Complete Assembly METAL RECESSING MEMBER PLACEMENT A wing nut assembly can be effectively used to secure the metal recessing member/anchor assembly to the form. Drill a properly placed hole in the form and thread the bolt assembly through the hole. Screw the bolt in the center hole of the recessing member until it is tight against the head of the anchor. Secure the assembly against the form by turning the loose-running wing nut. Nailing the recessing member, using the holes provided on both ends of the unit, will prevent the assembly from turning during concrete placement. In applications using multi-use metal forms, the metal recessing member can be tack welded to the form. When constructing a multi-use metal form, it is important that an access hole is placed for the insertion/removal of the steel wedge (for easy placement of wedge steel recess member, the multi use must be cut out to accept the bolt). RL

21 Rapid Lift Technical Information (cont.) STRIPPING Unscrew the bolt and strip the form to expose the recessing member. Tap the small end of the tapered wedge with a hammer to loosen the wedge so it can be withdrawn by hand. Now screw the setting bolt into the recessing member and continue screwing, using the fixed wing nut, until the recessing member is loosened from the anchor and can be removed. Engineered Lifting Systems RING CLUTCH INSTALLATION ANCHOR ATTACHMENT Make sure that the curved bolt handle is in the open position. Position the ring clutch above, and centered over the head of the anchor. Drop the ring clutch down into the void formed by the recessing member. Rotate the curved bolt through the anchor engagement hole into its closed position. Installation is complete, ready to lift. (A) Clutch Bail Clutch Bolt (B) 1

22 Rapid Lift Technical Information (cont.) BAIL POSITIONING Make sure that the bail does not get into a locked position under the ring clutch, as shown in the sketch. In this situation, the bail and/or ring clutch might bend under load and as the precast unit nears vertical, the bail can unlock itself and cause a severe impact load. Always position the lifting cable directly over the ring clutch to avoid alignment problems. CORRECT Correct - By not having the lift line directly over the Ring Clutch and a load is applied in a direction towards the bottom of the panel, the Clutch may bend over the panel edge. Proper Direction of lift Yes No Improper Direction of lift WRONG Wrong - The Clutch, if positioned below the ring clutch, as shown, may lock itself in a position preventing free movement of the unit. In this position the ball might bend during lift. As the panel is lifted the Clutch may bend. As the panel reaches a more vertical position, the Clutch will unlock itself resulting in an impact load. Direction of lift Manual Ring Clutch Bail Top of Panel Yes No Bending Manual Ring Clutch over panel edge May bend at this point or spall panel Direction of lift

23 Rapid Lift Technical Information (cont.) SLING ANGLE FACTOR Additional forces come to bear on an anchor from oblique pulls caused by the sling angle. Sling angles at less than 90 from perpendicular, increase the load on the anchor. Angles less than 30 are not safe and must not be used. To calculate the load on the anchor, refer to the accompanying table. Move across the table to the sling angle being used and multiply the corresponding magnification factor by the dead load of the precast element. Engineered Lifting Systems Sling Angle Load Factor 90º 1.00 SLING ANGLE LOAD FACTORS 75º º º º.00 ADJUSTING FOR CONCRETE STRENGTH Note: These factors are for use with tension applications only. Do not use these factors for shear applications without consulting with the Meadow Burke Service Center to make sure there are no other limitations. To convert the allowable tension load for an unreinforced anchor from listed concrete strength of 3,500 psi to a greater or lesser concrete strength, multiply 3,500 psi by the factor indicated below. Note: To maintain the needed 4:1 safety factor the new value must be less than 5% of the listed ultimate mechanical value of the selected anchor. CONCRETE STRENGTH ADJUSTMENT FACTORS To Increase For Greater Concrete Strength CONVERT FROM 3,500 PSI TO 4,000 PSI 3,500 PSI TO 4,500 PSI 3,500 PSI TO 5,000 PSI To Decrease For Lesser Concrete Strength CONVERT FROM 3,500 PSI TO 3,000 PSI 3,500 PSI TO,500 PSI 3,500 PSI TO,000 PSI MULTIPLY BY MULTIPLY BY

24 Rapid Lift Technical Information (cont.) SHEAR CONE CONDITIONS Condition 1: Full Shear Cone Condition This applies to anchors located in a concrete panel at a distance of at least (3h ef + A)/ (full shear cone width) from the edges. Determine the A (width) and B (length) dimensions of your anchor using the Anchor Embedment Data Table on page 0. Then go to the Table of A Nc Values on page 0. Move across the top row (Anchor Width A) to your anchor s width dimension. Drop down to the next row (Anchor Depth h ef ) and find the length dimension of your anchor. Drop down one more row (A Nc0 Values) and the value under your h ef dimension is the A Nco value for your anchor. 3h ef + A A N Plug the A NO, A Nco value and concrete strength into the appropriate formula on page 5 to determine anchor s ultimate pullout strength. Divide the pullout strength by four (4) to obtain the required 4:1 safety factor. Condition : Partial Shear Cone This applies to anchors located in a concrete panel at a distance of less than (3h ef + A)/ from the edges, as shown in condition to the left. Determine the A (width), h ef (length) and T (panel thickness) dimensions. Then go to the Table of A Nc Values on page 0. Move across the top row (Anchor Width A) to your anchor s width dimension. Drop down to the next row (Anchor Depth h ef ) and find the length dimension of your anchor. Drop down the column of A Nc Values to the value opposite your T dimension. This is the A Nc value for your anchor. Plug the A NO, A NCO value and the concrete strength into the appropriate formula on page 5 to determine anchor s ultimate pullout strength. Divide the pullout strength by four (4) to obtain the required 4:1 safety factor. 3h ef + A A N Condition 3: Partial Shear Cone This applies to anchors located in a concrete panel at a distance of more than (3h ef + A)/ from one edge, but at a lesser amount from another edge. Determine the A (width), h ef (length) and T/ dimensions from the anchor to the closest edge. Then go to the Table of A Nc Values on page 0. Move across the top row (Anchor Width A) to your anchor s width dimension. Drop down to the next row (Anchor Depth h ef ) and find the length dimension of your anchor. Drop down the column of A Nc Values to the value opposite your T dimension. Read the value listed under the appropriate T column and the A Nco value under the 3h ef + A column. Add the two together and multiply by 0.5. Ca,min 3h ef + A Plug the A Nc, A Nco value and the concrete strength into the appropriate formula on page 5 to determine anchor s ultimate pullout strength. Divide the pullout strength by four (4) to obtain the required 4:1 safety factor. A N 4

25 Rapid Lift Technical Information (cont.) EMBEDDED ANCHOR STRENGTH CALCULATIONS The embedded strength of many of the Rapid Lift anchors can be calculated using the tables and formulas on the following pages. Note that the Plate Anchor and Flat Foot Anchor will not obtain full ultimate mechanical strength if the recommended additional reinforcement is not used. Also note that it is not necessary to apply these formulas and tables to Two-Hole Anchors, Erection Anchors or Tech Erection Anchors utilizing extra reinforcement. These anchor applications will achieve ultimate capacity at 1,500 psi. Engineered Lifting Systems The following tabular data and formulas are based on industry accepted Precast Concrete Institute (PCI) calculations for pullout strength of embedded anchors. Some modification to the formulas has been done to more closely agree with actual testing of Rapid Lift anchors. Ring Clutch System 1-Ton -Ton -Ton 4-Ton 4-Ton 4-Ton 4-Ton 4-Ton 8-Ton 8-Ton -Ton -Ton 1-Ton -Ton 4-Ton 8-Ton 8-Ton -Ton 4-Ton 8-Ton -Ton -Ton -Ton -Ton -Ton 4-Ton 8-Ton Clutch I.D. 1.5T.5T.5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 10T 10T T T 1.5T.5T 5T 10T 10T.5T 5T 10T.5T.5T.5T.5T.5T 5T 10T *Available on special order or limited quantities on hand. TABLE DATA CALCULATION INFORMATION Anchor Item Anchor "A" Number Dimension SPREAD ANCHOR * 79174* /16" " /" /4" /4" TECH ERECTION ANCHOR /4" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/" 1 1/" 1 1/" 1 1/" 1 1/" 1/" 1/" 3 1/8" 3 1/8" ERECTION ANCHOR " 1/" 3 3/4" FLAT FOOT ANCHOR PLATE ANCHOR 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/" 1/" Anchor "B" Dimension 4 3/4" 4" 5 1/" 4" 4 3/4" 6 3/4" 6 1/4" 9 1/" 11" 11" 15" 18 7/8" 4 3/4" 8" 10 1/" 13/16" 13/16" 8" 10 1/" 13/16" 3/4" 3 3/8" 3/4" 3 3/8" 1/4" 4 3/8" 7 1/8" 3h ef + A 16" 14" 18" 14" 16" 1" " 30" 36" 36" 48" 60" 16" 6" 34" 43" 43" 6" 34" 43" 10" " 10" " 8" 15" 4" 5

26 A Nc TABLE (in ) ANCHOR WIDTH T 4T 6T 6T/8T T ANCHOR WIDTH A (in) 1-1/4 1-1/ -1/ 3-3/4-1/ 3-1/8 ANCHOR DEPTH hef (in) -1/4-3/4 3-3/ /4 5-1/ / 4 4-1/4 5-1/4 6-1/4 6-3/4 7-1/4 9-1/ 9-1/ 10-1/ -13/16 6-1/4 7-1/ /8 A Nco Thickness "T" / / / / / / / / / Above values include anchor setback in concrete.. Above values to be used in conjunction with the equations printed on pag 5, and reduced by 4 for lifting. 3. Ca,min = T/ 6

27 Rapid Lift Technical Information (cont.) RL-3 Ring Clutch System -ton 4-ton 8-ton -ton Ring Clutch System -ton Minimum Panel Thickness 5-1/8" 7-3/8" -3/16" 0-1/4" Minimum Panel Thickness 3-7/8" Anchor Selection for Min Panel Thickness Anchor Selection for Min Panel Thickness GUIDE TO MINIMUM PANEL THICKNESS Minimum Panel Thickness: The minimum thickness of concrete that is required to properly install Rapid-Lift Anchors (dimensions vary with anchor selection). The minimum Panel Thickness is the sum of the following dimensions: The anchor length ( B dimension), the surface to anchor dimension (3/8" for and 4-ton series anchors, and 5/8" for the 8-ton series anchors) and the 3/4" minimum of concrete cover below the bottom of the anchor. Engineered Lifting Systems RL-1 3/4" concrete cover beneath the feet of all types of spread anchors is required to obtain listed working loads. RL-4 Ring Clutch System -ton 4-ton 8-ton Ring Clutch System Minimum Panel Thickness 3-3/8" 5-1/" 8-1/" Minimum Panel Thickness Anchor Selection for Min Panel Thickness Anchor Selection for Min Panel Thickness *The RL-5 Tech Anchor and RL-4 Plate Anchor may be placed directly on the form. These are the ONLY Rapid-Lift Anchors that may be installed in this manner. However, the anchor base plate will be visible and exposed after the precast member is removed from the form. Rust may occur if not galvanized. RL-4 -ton 4-ton 8-ton -5/8" 4-3/4" 6-7/8" Ring Clutch System Minimum Panel Thickness Anchor Selection for Min Panel Thickness -ton 4-ton 3-5/8" 4-3/8" RL-5 Ring Clutch System Minimum Panel Thickness Anchor Selection for Min Panel Thickness -ton 4-ton -7/8" 3-7/8" RL-5 7

28 Rapid Lift Technical Information (cont.) RAPID LIFT ANCHORS USED IN THIN WALL SECTIONS Care must be taken when locating anchors in thin wall sections. Improper installation and/or misalignment can seriously reduce the safe working load of the anchor. Anchors must be positioned on the centerline of the panel. Use supports, spacers or tie the anchor to the rebar mat to make certain of proper positioning. Panel C.L. Panel C.L. T e T e T e This sketch shows a misaligned, improperly positioned anchor. The actual edge distance (Te) is considerably reduced so there must be a corresponding reduction in the safe working load of the anchor. This sketch shows proper positioning of the anchor on the centerline of the panel. This allows the full wall thickness to be used in the safe working load selection. Wall Thickness T e Minimum Corner Distance T e = Edge Thickness (1/ Wall Thickness) The sketch above shows an anchor application and corner relationship. Safe working loads for indicated corner distances are displayed in the table on page

29 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL- ONE TON ERECTION ANCHOR 1-Ton Only The RL- One Ton Anchor is specifically designed to lift and handle thin-wall precast concrete elements, such as architectural panels. The One Ton Anchor is designed to restrict the rotation of the ring clutch to prevent spalling of the concrete during the lifting process. Hot dip galvanize is the only finish available on this anchor. 3/4" 1-3/16" 1/4" 1-7/8" 3-1/16" Engineered Lifting Systems See the One Ton Ring Clutch on page 53, the One Ton Recessing Member on page 55. B 7/8" Note: In order to achieve the shear values shown in the table, the use of an optional shear bar is required. * The RL- One Ton Erection Anchor Weight Per Piece (lbs) /4" RL- The RL-31 Shear Bar (.375 ø) provides additional shear strength to prevent spalling. L RL-3 Item # Tension Bar Size.306 Dia. RL-3 30º Concrete Strength L Dim. 1,500-3,000psi - 4 The RL-3 Tension Bar provides simple and economical reinforcement for the erection anchor during tension lifts. RL- RAPID LIFT ONE TON ANCHOR DATA Nominal Anchor Load 1T 1T Clutch I.D. 1.5T 1.5T Item Number 79046G 79045G B () 4 3/4 8 Minimum Panel Thickness () 3 3 Shear.66:1 Safety Factor (lbs) Shear 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) Tension w/o Tension Bar 4:1Safety Factor (lbs) Tension w/ Tension Bar 4:1Safety Factor (lbs) Minimum Corner Distance () Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi. 1) The.66:1 safety factor is commonly used for back stripping operations. Unusual live loads or cable magnification may require a higher safety factor to be applied. To obtain the working loads shown, the shear bar shown above must be used. ) Given full embedment, reinforcement and 3,500 psi concrete, the One Ton Erection Anchor will achieve pullout strength equal to its ultimate mechanical strength. 3) The 8 unit is available on special order or limited supply on hand. It may be ordered galvanized or pla To order, specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. 9

30 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-3 TECH ERECTION ANCHOR -Ton, 4-Ton and 8-Ton High Capacity Available C The RL-3 Rapid Lift Tech Erection Anchor is designed for safe edge lifting and rotation of thinwall precast elements. The anchor is designed with two ears on the head of the anchor to restrict the rotation of the ring clutch. As a result, lateral forces are transmitted directly to the anchor instead of to the concrete to prevent spalling. Due to the stress caused by the shear lift on the concrete; it is necessary to add reinforcement in the direction of the lift. The RL-31 Rapid Lift Shear Bar is designed for this purpose and is available. See sketch below. See additional Shear Bar information on page 38. A D E Anchor dimensions are shown in the table below. Safe working loads and other pertinent information is displayed in the table on the next page. The RL-3 Tech Erection Anchor is available in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. B F G H See Ring Clutches on page 46, 47, and 48, the Recessing Members on 49, 50 and 53, and the Tension Bars on page 38. S Ring Clutch System T/.5T 4T/5T 8T/10T Clutch I.D..5T 5T 10T Item Number " 1/" 3 3/4" RL-3 RAPID LIFT TECH ERECTION ANCHOR DIMENSIONS A B C D E F G H S 8" 9 1/" 1/" 3/8" 5/8" 3/4" 1 13/16" 1/" 3 1/8" 1/4" 3 3/16" 4" 1 3/8" 1 13/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 1" 1 1/8" 1 1/4" 1 3/4" 5/8 3 5/8 Ultimate Mechanical Load (lbs) 16,000 3,000 64,000 Weight Each Piece (lbs) RL-3 The RL-31 Shear Bar (.375 ø) provides additional shear strength to prevent spalling. L RL-3 Refer to Page 38 for L RL-31 Shear Bar The RL-3 Tension Bar provides simple and economical reinforcement for the erection anchor during tension lifts. 30

31 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-3 TECH ERECTION ANCHOR Ring Clutch System T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T Clutch I.D..5T.5T.5T.5T.5T.5T.5T.5T.5T.5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 10T 10T 10T 10T 10T 10T Standard Item Number High Capcity Item Number 7957HC 7957HC 7957HC 7957HC 7957HC 7957HC 7957HC 7957HC 7957HC 7957HC 79548HC 79548HC 79548HC 79548HC 79548HC 79548HC 79548HC 79548HC 79589HC 79589HC 79589HC 79589HC 79589HC 79589HC Panel Thickness (in) 4" m 5" 5 1/" 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" " 5 1/" m 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" " 7 1/" m 8" 9" 10" 11" " RL-3 -TON, 4-TON, 8-TON Shear w/ Shear Bar.66:1 Safety Factor (lbs),50 3,160 3,460 3,780 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,00 4,490 4,670 5,140 5,490 5,790 5,910 6,030 6,030 6,030 6,190 6,430 6,650 6,850 Shear w/ Shear Bar 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) 1,490,110,130,50,870 3,160 3,40 3,640 3,840 4,000,670,990 3,170 3,430 3,650 3,860 3,930 4,010 4,010 4,010 4,0 4,80 4,40 4,550 Tension w/o Tension Bar 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) 3,190 3,900 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,970 5,170 6,030 6,910 7,750 8,000 8,000 8,000 7,0 7,690 8,640 9,580 10,610 11,680 Standard Tension w/ Tension Bar 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 16,000 16,000 16,000 16,000 16,000 16,000 High Capacity Tension w/ Tension Bar 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 Min Corner Distance (in) Engineered Lifting Systems Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi. 1) The.66:1 safety factor is commonly used for back stripping operations. Increased safety factor may be required for unusual live loads or cable magnification. ) To obtain the shear values shown, it is necessary to use the appropriate Meadow Burke shear bar or equal. 3) Given full embedment, reinforcement and minimum compressive strength concrete; Tech Erection Anchors should achieve a pull out strength equal to their ultimate mechanical strength. 4) Minimum anchor spacing is double the corner distance for unreinforced anchors. To order, specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. 31

32 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-4 RAPID LIFT TECH ERECTION ANCHOR WITH SHEAR PLATE STD: -Ton, 4-Ton and 8-Ton High Capacity:.5-Ton, 5-Ton and 10-Ton B High Capacity Available The RL-4 Tech Erection Anchor with Plate is similar in design and use to the RL-3 Tech Erection Anchor, but has the added shear plate to eliminate the need for a shear bar. This design feature gives the anchor a smaller height envelope allowing it to be used in thinner concrete panels. This anchor is available in the sizes shown in the table and in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. A D See Ring Clutches on page 46, 47, and 48, the Recessing Members on 49, 50 and 51, and the Tension Bars on page 38. C Ring Clutch System T/.5T 4T/5T 8T/10T Clutch I.D..5T 5T 10T Item Number Standard 7957SP 79548SP 79589SP Item Number High Capacity 7957SPHC 79548SPHC 79589SPHC See Standard RL-3 Tech Erection Anchor for all other dimensions. RL-4 TECH ERECTION ANCHOR WITH PLATE A B C D Weight (lbs) 1/" 1/" 3" 3/4" 1 1/4" 1 5/8" 3" 3" 3 1/" 1/4" 3/8" 3/8" Minimum Panel Thickness 3 1/" 4" 7" Ring Clutch System T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T Clutch I.D..5T.5T.5T.5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 10T 10T 10T Item Number Standard 7957SP 7957SP 7957SP 7957SP 79548SP 79548SP 79548SP 79548SP 79548SP 79589SP 79589SP 79589SP RL-4 -TON, 4-TON, 8-TON Item Number Panel SHEAR.66:1 Thickness High Capacity Safety Factor (in) (lbs) 7957SPHC 7957SPHC 7957SPHC 7957SPHC 79548SPHC 79548SPHC 79548SPHC 79548SPHC 79548SPHC 79589SPHC 79589SPHC 79589SPHC 3 1/" m 4" 4 1/" 5" 4" m 4 1/" 5" 5 1/" 6" 7" m 7 1/" 8" SHEAR 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) TENSION w/o Tension Bar 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) Standard TENSION w/ Tension Bar 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) ,000 16,000 16,000 High Capacity TENSION w/ Tension Bar 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) ,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 Min Corner Distance (in) Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi. 1) The.66:1 safety factor is commonly used for back stripping operations. Increased safety factor may be required for unusual live loads or cable magnification. ) Given full embedment, reinforcement and minimum compressive strength concrete; Tech Erection Anchors should achieve a pullout strength equal to their ultimate mechanical strength. 3) Minimum anchor spacing is double the corner distance for unreinforced anchors. To order, specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. 3

33 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-6 ERECTION ANCHOR -Ton, 4-Ton and 8-Ton The RL-6 Erection Anchor is similar in design and use to the standard RL-3 Tech Erection Anchor, but has a split-foot design to widely disperse applied loads and to enhance pullout capability. Refer to the accompanying Tables for size, availability and safe working loads. The RL-6 Erection Anchor is available in plain and hot dip galvanize finish. See Ring Clutches on page 5, 53, and 54, the Recessing Members on 55, 56 and 59, and the Tension Bars on page 44. C A D E H F B G S Engineered Lifting Systems Ring Clutch System T/.5T 4T/5T 8T/10T 8T/10T Clutch I.D. T/.5T 4T/5T 8T/10T 8T/10T Item Number A B C D E F G H S " 1/" 3 3/4" 3 3/4" 8" 10 1/" 13/16" 13/16" RL-6 ERECTION HEAD ANCHOR 3/8" 5/8" 5/8" 3/4" 1 13/16" 1/" 3 1/8" 3 1/8" 1/4" 3 3/16" 4" 4" 1 3/8" 1 13/16" 7/16" 7/16" 9/16" 3/4" 1" 1" 1 1/8" 1 1/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 3/4" 3 3/8" 5" 5" Ultimate Mechanical Load (lbs) 16,000 3,000 48,000 64,000 Weight Each Piece (lbs) Ring Clutch System T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T Clutch I.D..5T.5T.5T.5T.5T.5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 10T 10T 10T 10T 10T 10T 10T 10T 10T 10T 10T 10T Item Number Panel Thickness in Inches 4" m 5" 5 1/" 6" 7" 8" 5 1/" m 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" 11" " 7 1/" m 8" 9" 10" 11" " 7 1/" m 8" 9" 10" 11" " RL-6 -TON, 4-TON, 8-TON SHEAR w/ Shear Bar.66:1 Safety Factor 50 lbs SHEAR w/ Shear Bar 4:1 Safety Factor 1490 lbs TENSION w/o Tension Bar 4:1 Safety Factor 3190 lbs ,610 11, ,610 11,680 TENSION w/ Tension Bar 4:1 Safety Factor 4000 lbs ,000,000,000,000,000,000 16,000 16,000 16,000 16,000 16,000 16,000 Min Corner Distance (in) Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi. 1) The.66:1 safety factor is commonly used for back stripping operations. Increased safety factor may be required for unusual live loads or cable magnification. ) To obtain the shear values shown, it is necessary to use the appropriate Meadow Burke Shear Bar or equal. 3) Given full embedment, reinforcement and minimum compressive strength concrete; Erection Anchors should achieve a pullout strength equal to their ultimate mechanical strength. 4) Minimum anchor spacing is double the corner distance for unreinforced anchors. To order, specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. 33

34 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-7 ERECTION ANCHOR WITH SHEAR PLATE -Ton, 4-Ton and 8-Ton B The RL-7 Erection Anchor with Plate is similar in design and use to the RL-6 Erection Anchor, but has the added shear plate to eliminate the need for a shear bar. This design feature gives the anchor a smaller height envelope allowing it to be used in thinner concrete panels. The anchor is available in the sizes shown in the table in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. A See Ring Clutches on page 46, 47, and 48, the Recessing Members on 49, 50 and 53, and the Tension Bars on page 38. D C Ring Clutch System T/.5T 4T/5T 8T/10T 8T/10T Clutch I.D. Item Number A B C D.5T 5T 10T 10T RL-7 ERECTION ANCHOR WITH PLATE 1/" 1/" 3" 3" 3/4" 1 1/4" 1 5/8" 1 5/8" See standard RL-6 Erection Anchor for all other applicable dimensions. 3" 3" 3 1/" 3 1/" 1/4" 3/8" 3/8" 3/8" Weight (lbs) Minimum Panel Thickness 3 1/" 4" 7" 7" Ring Clutch System T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T Clutch I.D..5T.5T.5T.5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 10T 10T 10T 10T 10T 10T Item Number RL-7 -TON, 4-TON, 6-TON, 8-TON Panel Thickness in Inches 3 1/" m 4" 4 1/" 5" 4" m 4 1/" 5" 5 1/" 6" 7" m 7 1/" 8" 7" m 7 1/" 8" SHEAR.66:1 Safety Factor (lbs),150,930 3,040 3,160,710 3,710 4,000 4,160 4,90 6,030 6,030 6,030 6,030 6,030 6,030 SHEAR 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) 1,430 1,950,00,100 1,800,470,660,770,860 4,010 4,010 4,010 4,010 4,010 4,010 TENSION w/o Tension Bar 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs),640 3,190 3,550 3,900 3,400 3,860 4,730 4,970 5,170 7,100 7,0 7,690 7,100 7,0 7,690 TENSION w/ Tension Bar 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000 8,000,000,000,000 16,000 16,000 16,000 Min Corner Distance (in) Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi. 1) The.66:1 safety factor is commonly used for back stripping operations. Increased safety factor may be required for unusual live loads or cable magnification. ) Given full embedment, reinforcement and minimum compressive strength concrete; Erection Anchors should achieve a pullout strength equal to their ultimate mechanical strength. 3) Minimum anchor spacing is double the corner distance for unreinforced anchors. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. 34

35 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-9 45º TECH ERECTION ANCHOR -Ton, 4-Ton and 8-Ton The RL-9 Tech Erection Anchor - 45 is an adaptation of the regular Tech Erection Anchor for use with panels where the lifting edge is cast at a 45 angle. The anchor is available in the sizes shown in the table and in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. Engineered Lifting Systems NOTE: A RL-3 Tension Bar is required with this anchor. See Ring Clutches on page 5, 53, and 54, the Recessing Members on 55, 56 and 59, and the Tension Bars on page 44. A 3" RL-9 45º TECH ERECTION ANCHOR - 45º DATA Ring Clutch System Clutch I.D. Item Number A Panel Thickness (in) Shear 4:1 Safety Factor Tension w/ Tension Bar 4:1 Safety Factor Min Corner Distance (in) T/.5T 4T/5T 8T/10T.5T 5T 10T 7957SP SP SP /" 8" 9" Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi. 1 Given full embedment, reinforcement and minimum compressive strength concrete; Erection Head Anchors should achieve a pull out strength equal to their ultimate mechanical strength. This insert requires " concrete below or underneath the shear plate. 3 Load based on 500 PSI compressive concrete strength 4 Shear value can be increased by the ration of square roots of the compressive strength up to the maximum tension capacity of 7400 lbs To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. C High Capacity Available RL-10 RL-10 ERECTION HEAD ANCHOR -Ton, 4-Ton and 8-Ton The RL-10 Erection Head Anchor is designed to be used in conjunction with the Tension Bar in thin-wall sections. It is an ideal choice for spall-free performance in A- frame or tilt table applications. F D E B See Ring Clutches on page 5, 53, and 54, the Recessing Members on 55, 56 and 59, and the Tension Bars on page 44. G A H RL-3 RL-10 ERECTION HEAD ANCHOR Ring Clutch System Clutch I.D. Standard Item Number High Capacity Item Number A B C D E F G H Starndard Allowable Reinforced Tension Load SF 4:1 (lbs) High Capacity Allowable Reinforced Tension Load SF 4:1 (lbs) Weight Each Piece (lbs) Min Panel Thickness (in) Min Corner Distance (in) T/.5T 4T/5T 8T/10T 8T/10T.5T 5T 10T 10T HC 79075HC 79185HC " 1/" 3 3/4" 3 3/4" 4 1/4" 7 7/16" 13 1/4" 13 1/4" 3/8" 5/8" 5/8" 3/4" 1 13/16" 1/" 3 1/8" 3 1/8" 3/8" 3 3/16" 4" 4" 1 3/8" 1 7/8" 7/16" 7/16" 5/8" 3/4" 1" 1" 1 3/3" 1 1/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" ,000 16, ,000 0, Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi. 1) To obtain the shear values shown, it is necessary to use the appropriate Meadow Burke shear bar or equal. ) Given full embedment, reinforcement and minimum compressive strength concrete; Erection Head Anchors should achieve a pull out strength equal to their ultimate mechanical strength. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. 35

36 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-11 ERECTION HEAD ANCHOR WITH PLATE -Ton, 4-Ton and 8-Ton A High Capacity Available The RL-11 Erection Head Anchor with Plate is similar in design and use to the RL-10 Erection Head Anchor, but has the added shear plate to provide additional shear capability and eliminate the need for a shear bar. This design feature gives the anchor a smaller height envelope allowing it to be used in thinner concrete panels. The anchor is available in the sizes shown in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. See Ring Clutches on page 46, 47, and 48, the Recessing Members on 49, 50 and 53, and the Tension Bars on page 38. B C RL-11 RL-3 D Ring Clutch System T/.5T 4T/5T 8T/10T RL-11 RAPID LIFT ERECTION HEAD WITH PLATE ANCHOR Clutch I.D. Item Number High Capacity Minimum Panel A B C D Item Number Thickness.5T 5T 10T 79403SP 79075SP 79185SP 79403SPHC 79075SPHC 79185SPHC -1/ -1/ 3 3/4 1-1/4 1-5/ / 1/4 3/8 3/8 4" 5-1/ 7 Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi. 1) Given full embedment, tension bar reinforcement, and minimum compressive strength concrete; Erection Head Anchors achieve a pull out strength equal to their ultimate mechanical strength. * Shear capacity is less than the standard erection anchor due to the shorter length. The 8-ton erection head two-hole anchor loads are equal to the standard erection anchor due to length. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. Shear 4:1 S.F. (lbs)* 35* 670* 4010* Min Corner Distance (in) 18 RL-10 ERECTION HEAD ANCHOR with WELDED REBAR Item Number Rebar Size Inch Metric Concrete Strength 1,500 psi,000 psi 3,000 psi * Grade 60 Rebar #5* #16* 30" 6" 1" #7* #* 48" 4" 34" L Dimension #8* #5* 79" 69" 57" #10* #3* 104" 90" 74" L Weld Length: /8" fillet welds () /8" fillet welds () /8" fillet welds () /8" fillet welds () 36

37 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-1 FLAT FOOT ANCHOR -Ton The RL-1 Flat Foot Anchor is designed for back stripping and lifting thin-wall precast elements. The legs of the anchor extend out sufficiently to accommodate recommended additional reinforcing steel. See recommended reinforcing method and sketch below. Refer to the table for anchor dimensions and safe working loads. The Flat Foot Anchor is available in the sizes shown in the table and in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. A C Engineered Lifting Systems See Ring Clutches on page 5, 53, and 54, the Recessing Members on 55, 56 and 59, and the Tension Bars on page 44. Reinforcing Recommendation: Crisscross the legs of the anchor with four (4) 18 lengths of #4 rebar as shown in the sketch. NOTE: A minimum 3/4" concrete cover below the anchor is required to achieve posted working loads. B S Ring Clutch System T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T 4T/5T 8T/10T Clutch I.D..5T.5T.5T.5T 5T 10T Item Number A 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" B 3/4" 3 3/8" 3/4" 3 3/8" RL-1 FLAT FOOT ANCHOR DATA C 3/16" 3/16" 3/8" 3/8" S 4" 4" 4" 4" Allowable Unreinforced Tension Load 4:1 SF (lbs) 1 1,35 1,893 1,35 1,893 Allowable Reinforced Tension Load 4:1 SF (lbs),000,000 4,000 4,000 Discontinued: See Plate Anchor Item 45847, page 36. Discontinued: See Plate Anchor Item 79054, page 36. Ultimate Mechanical Load Tension (lbs) 8,000 8,000 16,000 16,000 Weight Per Piece (lbs) ) Tension values shown are based on 3,500 psi standard weight concrete and a minimum edge distance of (B+A)/. ) Tension values shown are based on 3,000 psi standard weight concrete, a minimum edge distance of 10 and #4 rebar cut to 18 lengths reinforcing the anchor as shown in the sketch. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. The flat feet of the anchor extend or more on each side of the anchor to accommodate the recommended reinforcing steel. NOTE: The flat foot anchor has allowable face shear loads that are equal to or greater than unreinforced face tension loads for anchors located in a panel or concrete unit at a distance of at least B+A from the edges. #4 Bar (Typical) 37

38 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL- TWO HOLE ANCHOR Standard: -Ton, 4-Ton, 8-Ton and -Ton High:.5-Ton, 5-Ton, 10-Ton High Capacity Available The RL- Two Hole Anchor is effectively used for stripping panels from tilt tables and transporting panels. It is also a good choice in applications where spread-type anchors can t be used and in panels constructed with lightweight concrete. It is designed with a secondary hole that can accept additional rebar or a Tension Bar to increase lifting capacity and to distribute lifting loads deep into the concrete. The Two Hole Anchor is available in the sizes shown in the table and in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. B D E Minimum reinforcing length (L) is needed to develop the full strength of the anchor. See Ring Clutches on page 46, 47, and 48, the Recessing Members on 49, 50 and 53, and the Tension Bars on page 38. G A C Ring Clutch System T/.5T T/.5T 4T/5T 8T/10T T/6T Clutch I.D..5T.5T 5T 10T 6T Item Number RL- RAPID LIFT TWO HOLE ANCHOR High Capacity Item Number 79HC 794HC 795HC A 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/" 1/" 3 1/8" B 4" 3/4" 5 1/" 7" 11 3/4" C 3/8" 3/8" 5/8" 3/4" 1" D 3/4" 9/16" 13/16" 1 3/16" 1 13/16" E 9/16" 5/8" 13/16" 1 7/16" 1 13/16" G 9/16" 9/16" 11/16" 1" 1 3/8" Standard Allowable Reinforced Tension Load 4:1 SF (lbs) 4,000 4,000 8,000 16,000 44,000 High Capacity TENSION w/ Tension Bar 4:1 Safety Factor (lbs) 10,000 0,000 Weight Each (lbs) Minimum Panel Thickness (in) 3/4 3/ Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF. Refer to table below for tension bar length at desired concrete strength. Minimum concrete compression strength = 1500 psi. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. TYPICAL TWO HOLE ANCHOR REINFORCEMENT RL-3 Tension Bar RL- RL-3 TENSION BAR for STANDARD and HIGH CAPACITY Load Group -Ton.5-Ton 4-Ton 5-Ton 8-Ton Rebar Size Concrete Strength (psi) 1,500 Inch Metric #3 # #4 # #4 # #5 # #6 # Ton #7 # L Dimension (overall length of rebar) 7-6 -Ton #9 #9-0 Reinforcement using the Rapid Lift Tension Bar. L,000, º 3, RL-3 4, ,

39 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-3 SPREAD ANCHOR -Ton, 4-Ton, 8-Ton and -Ton The RL-3 Spread Anchor is designed with a spread-foot that produces exceptional pull out capacity. This versatile anchor can be used in the face, back or edge of panels for back stripping and rotation from horizontal to vertical. This anchor can be pulled in any direction as long as minimum edge distance is maintained. However spalling may occur when pulling in shear perpendicular to the long side of the void. A minimum 3/4 concrete cover below the anchor is recommended. The Spread Anchor is available in the sizes shown in the table and in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. A C Engineered Lifting Systems See Ring Clutches on page 5, 53, and 54, the Recessing Members on 55, 56 and 59, and the Tension Bars on page 44. B NOTE: The spread anchor has allowable face shear loads that are equal to or greater than the face tension loads for anchors located in a panel or concrete unit at a distance of 3B+A from the edge. In order to achieve these loads, shear has to be applied parallel to long side of void. S RL-3 SPREAD ANCHOR DATA Ring Clutch System T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 8T/10T 8T/10T T/6T T/6T Clutch I.D..5T.5T.5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 5T 10T 10T 6T 6T Item Number Additional Hole No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A B C S 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/" 1 1/" 1 1/" 1 1/" 1 1/" 1/" 1/" 3 1/8" 3 1/8" 4 3/4" 4" 5 1/" 4" 4 3/4" 6 3/4" 6 1/4" 9 1/" 11" 11" 15" 18 7/8" 3/16" 3/8" 3/8" 1/" 1/" 1/" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 3/4" 3/4" 1" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3 3/8" 3 3/8" 3 3/8" 3 3/8" 3 3/8" 5 1/4" 5 1/4" 6 1/4" 6 1/4" Allowable Unreinforced Tension Load 4:1 SF (lbs),000,530 4,000,670 3,590 6,70 5,850 8,000,000 16,000 3,800 44,000 Ultimate Mechanical Load Tension (lbs) 8,000 16,000 16,000 4,000 4,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 48,000 64, , ,000 Weight Per Piece (lbs) Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi. * In order to achieve these loads, shear has to be long side of void. Refer to pages 40 and 41 for anchor capacities in thin wall applications. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. 39

40 Rapid Lift System Anchors RAPID LIFT SPREAD ANCHORS USED IN THIN WALL SECTIONS Care must be taken when locating anchors in thin wall sections. Improper installation and/or misalignment can seriously reduce the safe working load of the anchor. Anchors must be positioned on the centerline of the panel. Use supports, spacers or tie the anchor to the rebar mat to make sure of proper positioning. This sketch shows proper positioning of the anchor on the centerline of the panel. This allows the full wall thickness to be used in the safe working load selection. Te = Actual Edge Thickness (1/ Wall Thickness) When used in conjunction with the RL-3 Tension Bar, the RL-3 Anchor will achieve the full mechanical capacity when installed in a thin wall. SINGLE RL-3 SPREAD ANCHOR TENSILE CAPACITIES IN THIN WALLS (cont.) Rapid Lift Anchor Ton & Length Ton X 4" Ton X 5 1/" 4 Ton X 6 1/4" 4 Ton X 9 1/" 6 Ton or 8 Ton X 11" RL-3 TENSILE CAPACITY Critical Wall Thickness Actual Edge Thickness (T e ) Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor Actual Corner Distance inches inches 8 inches inches 18 inches 4 inches 30 inches " 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 4 1/" " 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 4 1/" " 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 4 1/" " 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 4 1/" 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 4 1/" 5" 1,400 lbs 1,700,000,00,400,500 1,800,300,700 3,100 3,400 3,800,100,600 3,00 3,600 4,100 4,500 3,000 3,800 4,500 5,300 6,000 6,700 4,000 4,800 5,600 6,400 7,100 7,900 1,600 lbs,000,00,500,700,700,000,500,900 3,400 3,800 4,000,300,900 3,500 4,000 4,500 5,000 3,00 4,000 4,800 5,600 6,400 7,00 4,600 5,500 6,500 7,400 8,300 9,00 Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 4,500 psi concrete. 1,600 lbs,000,300,600,800,800,00,800 3,300 3,700 4,000 4,000,500 3,00 3,800 4,400 4,900 5,400 3,400 4,300 5,00 6,000 6,800 7,600 4,800 5,800 6,800 7,800 8,800 9,700 1,600 lbs,000,300,600,800,800,00,800 3,300 3,700 4,000 4,000,500 3,00 3,800 4,400 4,900 5,400 3,600 4,500 5,400 6,300 7,00 8,000 5,100 6,100 7,100 8,00 9,00 10,000 1,600 lbs,000,800,600,800,800,00,800 3,300 3,700 4,000 4,000,500 3,00 3,800 4,400 4,900 5,400 3,800 4,800 5,800 6,700 7,600 8,000 5,400 6,500 7,600 8,700 9,700 10,

41 Rapid Lift System Anchors MULTIPLE RL-3 SPREAD ANCHOR TENSILE CAPACITES IN THIN WALLS When multiple anchors are placed in a thin wall panel, caution must be exercised to prevent the anchor shear cone planes from overlapping. If overlapping is unavoidable, the anchor safe working load must be reduced. If a spacing of six times the length of the anchor or more is maintained, the anchor shear cones will not overlap and maximum tensile capacities can be achieved. Reference the following sketch and accompanying table. Engineered Lifting Systems Overlapping results in drastic safe working load reductions Alternate cone area Rapid Lift Anchor Ton & Length Ton X 4" Ton X 5 1/" 4 Ton X 6 1/4" 4 Ton X 9 1/" 6 Ton or 8 Ton X 11" RL-3 TENSILE CAPACITY Critical Wall Thickness Actual Edge Thickness (T e ) Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor Anchor Spacing inches inches 18 inches 4 inches 30 inches 36 inches 48 inches " 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 4 1/" " 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 4 1/" " 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 4 1/" " 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 4 1/" 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 4 1/" 5" 1,300 lbs 1,600 1,900,100,00,300 1,600,000,300,600,900 3,00 1,700,100,500,900 3,300 3,600,100,600 3,100 3,600 4,100 4,600,400,800 3,300 3,800 4,00 4,700 Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 4,500 psi. 1,500 lbs 1,900,00,500,600,700 1,800,00,600 3,000 3,400 3,700 1,900,400,800 3,300 3,700 4,100,500 3,100 3,700 4,300 4,900 5,500 3,500 4,00 4,900 5,600 6,300 6,900 1,600 lbs,000,300,600,700,800,000,500 3,000 3,400 3,800 4,000,400 3,000 3,500 4,100 4,600 5,100,900 3,700 4,400 5,100 5,800 6,500 4,000 4,800 5,600 6,400 7,00 8,000 1,600 lbs,000,300,600,700,800,00,700 3,00 3,700 4,000 4,000,500 3,00 3,800 4,400 4,900 5,400 3,400 4,300 5,100 5,900 6,700 7,500 4,500 5,500 6,400 7,300 8,00 9,000 1,600 lbs,000,300,600,700,800,00,700 3,00 3,700 4,000 4,000,500 3,00 3,800 4,400 4,900 5,400 3,900 4,800 5,800 6,700 7,700 8,000 5,100 6,00 7,00 8,00 9,00 10,

42 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-4 PLATE ANCHOR -Ton, 4-Ton and 8-Ton The RL-4 Plate Anchor is designed with a plate welded to the bottom to provide high pullout strength with a low profile. This design makes the anchor ideal for face and back lifts of thin-wall units and stripping, handling and erection applications. The Plate Anchor is available in the sizes shown in the table and in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. B A C See Ring clutches on page 46, 47, and 48, and the Recessing Members on page 49, 50 and 53. Reinforcing Recommendation: Crisscross the lower plate of the anchor with four (4) 18 long #4 rebar as shown in the sketch. S A #4 Bar (Typical) Typical method of reinforcing Plate Anchors NOTE: The Plate Anchor has allowable face shear loads that are equal to or greater than the unreinforced face tension loads for anchors located in a panel or concrete unit at a distance of at least 3B+A from the edges. Ring Clutch System T/.5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 8T/10T 8T/10T 8T/10T Clutch I.D..5T 5T 5T 5T 10T 10T 10T Item Number RL-4 RAPID LIFT PLATE ANCHOR DATA A B C S 1 1/4" 1 1/" 1 1/" 1 1/" 1/" 1/ 1/4" 3" 3 1/" 4 3/8" 6 1/4 7 1/8" 7 1/8" Allowable Unreinforced Tension Load 4:1 SF (lbs) Allowable Reinforced Tension Load 4:1 SF (lbs) 1 1) Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi and a minimum edge distance of (3B+A)/. ) Tension values shown are based on 3,000 psi standard weight concrete, a minimum edge distance of 10 and #4 rebar cut to 18 lengths reinforcing the anchor as shown in the sketch. 3) Available with plate anchor base. 3/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 3/4" 3/4 Ultimate Mechanical Load Tension (lbs) 3 3/4" 3" 3" 3 7/8" ,574 4,700 4,73 6,350 4,000 8,000 8,000 8,000,000 16,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 64,000 Discontinued: See Plate Anchor Item " 10,000 16,000 64,000 Weight Per Piece (lbs) To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. RL-60 PLATE ANCHOR BASE 4-Ton The RL-60 Plate Anchor Base is a plastic base designed for use with specific RL-4 Plate Anchor 4-Ton units (item numbers and 45847) to hold and position the anchors in face lift applications. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. 4

43 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-5 TECH ANCHOR -Ton and 4-Ton The RL-5 Tech Anchor has been developed with a unique foot design to increase tension capacity without adding extra reinforcement. Longer sizes of the anchor are supplied with a secondary hole to accommodate the addition of a tension bar for use when required. The Tech Anchor is available in the sizes shown in the table and in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. See Ring Clutches on page 5, 53, and 54, the Recessing Members on 55, 56 and 59, and the Tension Bars on page 44. B Engineered Lifting Systems NOTE: The tech anchor has allowable face shear loads that are equal to or greater than the face tension loads for anchors located in a panel or concrete unit at a distance of 3B+A from the edge. A C RL-5 TECH ANCHOR - FACE TENSION DATA Ring Clutch System T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T Clutch I.D..5T.5T.5T 5T 5T 5T Item Number Extra Hole No No Yes No No Yes A 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/" 1 1/" 1 1/" B 7/16" 3 7/16" 4 15/16" 3 7/16" 4 7/16" 5 7/16" C 3/8" 3/8" 3/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" Minimum Panel Thickness 3" 4" 5.5" 4" 5" 6" Tension Load :1 SF (lbs) 4,955 5,000 5,000 8,610 10,000 10,000 Tension Load 4:1 SF (lbs),480,885 4,000 4,305 5,445 7,15 Ultimate Mechanical Strength (lbs) 16,000 16,000 16,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 Weight Each (lbs) Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 3,500 psi normal weight and a minimum edge distance of B+A. Anchors in edge tension that are reinforced with a tension bar will achieve the full rated load in 1,500 psi concrete. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. RL-5 30º L RL-3 (see page 38 for L ) RL-5 TECH ANCHOR IN EDGE TENSION DATA Ring Clutch System T/.5T T/.5T T/.5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T Clutch I.D..5T.5T.5T 5T 5T 5T Item Number Extra Hole Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" 1 1/" 1 1/" 1 1/" B 9 1/" 9 1/" 9 1/" 9 1/" 9 1/" 9 1/" C 3/8" 3/8" 3/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" Minimum Panel Thickness 3.5" 4.5" 5.5" 4" 5" 6" Tension Load :1 SF (lbs) 6,560 7,600 8,000 5,340 8,950,660 Tension Load 4:1 SF (lbs) 3,80 3,800 4,000,670 4,475 6,330 Ultimate Mechanical Strength (lbs) 16,000 16,000 16,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 Weight Each (lbs)

44 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-31 SHEAR BAR 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton and 8-Ton The RL-31 Shear Bar is used to provide simple and economical reinforcement for erection anchors during the rotation of edge-lifted panels. The unit fits over the anchor to spread the shear stress and prevent spalling of the concrete. ø A L Top View Exposed Face Equal 3/4 Clear Minimum Bottom Face RL-6 Erection Anchor RL-31Shear Bar Equal 3/4 Clear M Bottom Face Shear Bar RL-6 Erection Anchor RL-31 SHEAR BAR DATA Ring Clutch System Clutch I.D. Item Number A L ø Minimum Panel Thickness Weight (lbs) 1T/1.5T T/.5T 4T/5T 8T/10T 1.5T.5T 5T 10T /8" 1/" 1/" 1/" 1 5/8" 1/" 3 5/16" 4 15/16" 13" 14-3/4" 14-3/4" 14-3/4" 3" 4" 5 1/" 7 1/" To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. RL-3 TENSION BAR -Ton, 4-Ton, 8-Ton and -Ton RL-3 TENSION BAR for STANDARD and HIGH CAPACITY Load Group -Ton.5-Ton 4-Ton 5-Ton 8-Ton 10-Ton -Ton The RL-3 Tension Bar is used in conjunction with an erection anchor to increase tensionlifting capacity by transferring the tension loads deeply into the concrete member. Rebar Size Inch Metric Concrete Strength (psi) 1,500 #3 # #4 # #4 # #5 # #6 # #7 # L Dimension (overall length of rebar) 7-6 #9 #9-0 L, º, To Order, Specify: quantity, name, rebar size (inch) and length L. 3,000 4, , Grade 60 Rebar 44

45 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-6 T-BAR ANCHOR 4-Ton The RL-6 T-Bar Anchor gets its name from the horizontal bar running through the bottom portion of the anchor to form an inverted T. This design produces exceptional pullout strength for use in back-stripping and panel rotation applications. The T-Bar Anchor is available in the sizes shown in the table and in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. This anchor uses the standard 4-Ton recess members and for face lift applications can be furnished assembled with the T-Bar Anchor Base/Void/Cover as seen below. Note: The Base/Void/Cover package mentioned above can be purchased as a separate package or can be ordered and installed at the factory. If you want the package installed at the factory, it must be specified at the same time the anchor order is placed. B A 3/8 3/8 added to top & bottom to allow for plastic Engineered Lifting Systems The T-Bar Anchor uses Rapid Lift 4-Ton or Super Lift II (Tilt-Up system) accessories. To use the T-Bar Anchor with the Anchor Base/Void/Cover package, order the anchors by panel thickness. For example: for a six-inch panel use a 5-1/4 anchor. The anchor plus 3/8 setback and the 3/8 for the base equals 6 for the slab thickness. S C 3/8 See Ring Clutches on page 5 and Recessing Members on 55, 56, and 59. To order Super-Lift II Anchors, slab thickness should equal anchor height with plastic assembled. RL-6 T-BAR ANCHOR DATA Ring Clutch System 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T Clutch I.D. 5T 5T 5T 5T Item Number w/o Plastic RL Item Number Assembled RL-9 45SL050 45SL060 45SL070 45SL080 A B C S 1 1/" 1 1/" 1 1/" 1 1/" 4 1/4" 5 1/4" 6 1/4" 7 1/4" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 11/16" 11/16" 11/16" 11/16" Allowable Unreinforced Tension Load 4:1 SF (lbs) 5,500 8,000 8,000 8,000 Ultimate Mechanical Strength (lbs) 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 Weight Per Piece (lbs) Weight Per Piece w/plastic (lbs) Tension values are based on 3,500 psi concrete and a minimum edge distance of (B+A)/. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. RL-9 T-BAR 4-TON ANCHOR ASSEMBLY The total assembly (RL-9) is available with the plastic installed at the factory. The plastic package (RL-41) base/void/cover is available without anchor. Each item (RL-6, RL-7, RL-8) is separately available from the factory. RL-9 Assembly RL-7 Void & Cover The RL-9 comes fully assembled with plastic and anchor for easy installation To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. The RL-8 base gives stable support and proper height for the appropriate panel size 45

46 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-14 SANDWICH PANEL ERECTION ANCHOR 4-Ton and 8-Ton with Minimum 8 Panel Thickness D The RL-14 Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor is designed to effectively lift and handle precast concrete sandwich panels. The Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor is easy to install and requires no special lifting equipment, only the standard 4 or 8-Ton ring clutch. Its unique design distributes the lifting loads evenly into both wythes of the panel and absorbs shear loads without spalling the concrete. The Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor is available in the sizes shown in the table and in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. The Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor requires proper reinforcement, as shown in the product sketch. Refer to Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor Reinforcement Details on page 47. C A 4-3/8" B See Ring Clutches on page 5, 53, and 54, the Recessing Members on 55, 56 and 57. Ring Clutch System 4T/5T 8T/10T Clutch I.D. Item Number A B C D 5T 10T RL-14 SANDWICH PANEL ERECTION ANCHOR DATA 6" 6" 3 1/4" 4 3/4" 1 13/16" 3 3/8" 5/8" 3/4" Ultimate Mech. Load Tension (lbs) 3,000 64,000 Weight Per Piece (lbs) Concrete Concrete Insulation Insulation Concrete Concrete 3 Ring Clutch System 4T/5T 8T/10T Ring Clutch System 4T/5T 8T/10T RL-14 8" SANDWICH PANEL (3" X " X 3") Tension (lbs) 8,000 16,000 Tension (lbs) 8,000 16,000 Shear Parallel to Anchor Width SF =.66:1 (lbs) 5,170 4,500 RL-14 8" SANDWICH PANEL (4" X " X ") Shear Parallel to Anchor Width SF =.66:1 (lbs) 4,950 5, Ton Anchors require 3,300 PSI concrete compressive strength to achieve shear strength.. 8-Ton Anchors require 4,500 PSI concrete compressive strength to achieve shear strength. Shear Perpendicular to Anchor Width SF = 4:1 (lbs) 8,000 9,400 Shear Perpendicular to Anchor Width SF = 4:1 (lbs) 8,000 10,500 The.66:1 safety factor is commonly used for back stripping operations. Increased safety factor may be required for unusual live loads or cable magnification. 4-Ton anchor: Given full embedment, reinforced with two #3 rebar -6 long bent as shown on page 47 and minimum compressive strength of 3,300 psi concrete; the 4-Ton Sandwich Anchor should achieve a pullout strength equal to their ultimate mechanical strength. 8-Ton anchor: Given full embedment, reinforced with two #5 rebar 3-6 long bent as shown on page 47 and minimum compressive strength of 4,500 psi concrete; the 8-Ton Sandwich Anchor should achieve a pullout strength equal to their ultimate mechanical strength. 3 8" SANDWICH PANEL (3" X " X 3") 4 8" SANDWICH PANEL (4" X " X ") To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. 46

47 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-15 SANDWICH PANEL ERECTION ANCHOR 4-Ton with Maximum Insulation Thickness The RL-15 Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor is a smaller version of the sandwich anchor designed to effectively lift and handle precast concrete sandwich panels with a maximum insulation thickness of. It is easy to install and requires no special lifting equipment, only the standard 4-Ton ring clutch. Its unique design distributes the lifting loads evenly into both wythes of the panel and absorbs shear loads without spalling the concrete. The Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor is available in the sizes shown in the table and in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. The Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor requires proper reinforcement, as shown in the product sketch. Refer to Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor Reinforcement Details below. C D B Engineered Lifting Systems See Ring Clutches on page 5, 53, and 54, the Recessing Members on 55, 56 and /8" A RL-15 SANDWICH PANEL ERECTION ANCHOR DATA Ring Clutch Ultimate Mech. Weight Clutch I.D. Item Number A B C D System Load Tension (lbs) Per Piece (lbs) 4T/5T 5T " 3 1/4" 1/16" 5/8" 3, Concrete Insulation Concrete Concrete Insulation Concrete Ring Clutch System 4T/5T 6" SANDWICH PANEL (" X " X ") Tension Shear Parallel to Anchor Width Shear Perpendicular to Anchor (lbs) SF =.66:1 (lbs) Width SF = 4:1 (lbs) 6,500 1,5 3,750 The.66:1 safety factor is commonly used for back stripping operations. Increased safety factor may be required for unusual live loads or cable magnification. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. Item Number SANDWICH PANEL ERECTION ANCHORS REINFORCEMENT DETAILS FOR RL-14 & RL-15 Ring Clutch Panel Thickness Minimum Panel Reinforcement Required System Bottom Wythe Insulation Top Wythe Thickness Rebar Size & Length Bend Required Bottom Bend Required Top 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T 8T/10T 8T/10T 3" 4" " 3" 4" " " " " " 3" " " 3" " 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" #3 X -6" #3 X -6" #3 X 7-0" #5 X 3-6" #5 X 3-6" NO NO YES NO NO NO YES YES YES YES 4" BEND DETAIL 5/8" ANCHOR REBAR HOLE 47

48 Rapid Lift System Anchors RL-16 SANDWICH PANEL ERECTION ANCHOR WITH PLATE 4-Ton with Maximum Insulation Thickness SHEAR PLATE " X 3 X 1/4" The RL-16 Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor with Plate is designed to effectively lift and handle x x prestressed sandwich panels. Two shaped reinforcement bars distribute the tension stress evenly into both concrete wythes and the shear plate absorbs the shear stress without spalling the concrete. Refer to the reinforcement bar information shown below. The Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor with Plate is available in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. B C See Ring Clutches on page 46, 47, and 48, the Recessing Members on 49, 50 and 53. A 3/8" RL-16 SANDWICH PANEL ERECTION ANCHOR W/PLATE DATA Ring Clutch Ultimate Mech. Weight Clutch I.D. Item Number A B C D System Load Tension (lbs) Per Piece (lbs) 4T/5T 5T 790 4" 3 3/4" 1/16" 5/8" 3, Concrete Insulation Concrete Concrete Insulation Concrete Ring Clutch System 4T/5T 4T/5T 4T/5T Concrete Strength (psi) 3,000 3,500 4,000 6" SANDWICH PANEL (" X " X ") Tension (lbs) 7,580 7,580 7,580 Shear Parallel to Anchor Width SF =.66:1 (lbs),500,700,890 Shear Perpendicular to Anchor Width SF = 4:1 (lbs) 4,50 4,890 5,30 The.66:1 safety factor is commonly used for back stripping operations. Increased safety factor may be required for unusual live loads or cable magnification. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. RL-16 SANDWICH PANEL ERECTION ANCHORS W/PLATE REINFORCEMENT DETAILS Ring Clutch Panel Thickness Minimum Panel Reinforcement Required Item Number System Bottom Wythe Insulation Top Wythe Thickness Rebar Size & Length Bend Required Bottom Bend Required Top 790 4T/5T " " " 6" #3 X 7-0" YES YES Reinforcement detail for 7917 & 790 MINIMUM RADIUS 8" 3" 30" 4" 5/8" 48

49 Rapid Lift System Anchors C RL-6 DOUBLE-T ANCHOR 7.5-Ton The RL-6 Double-T Anchor 7.5 Ton is simple in design, but very effective in its function of lifting and handling precast Single and Double Tees. The recessed anchor allows quick and easy finishing; no lifting strands to cut or burn off, only a simple patch of the recess. The anchor is available in plain finish only. Longer lengths are available on special order. A Engineered Lifting Systems See Ring Clutch on page 54, and the Double-T Void below. B D F E F Item Number Ring Clutch System Clutch I.D. RL-6 DOUBLE-T ANCHOR TON DATA A B C D E F Table is based on dead load only, 150 PCF and a standard concrete compressive strength of 5,500 psi. 8T Clutch can be used with 791 8T void former and foam strip. Allowable Tension Load 4:1 SF (lbs) Ultimate Mechanical Load Tension (lbs) 45SL3011 8T/10T 10T 35º 3/16" 3/4" 4" 1 1/4" " 0,000 80, Weight Per Piece (lbs) To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. J P RL-65 DOUBLE-T VOID 7.5 TON 8-Ton H I The RL-63 or RL-65 Double-T Void 7.5 Ton is a disposable plastic recess member furnished for use with the 8-Ton Double-T 7.5 Ton Anchor. K 7.50-TON DOUBLE-T VOID Ring Clutch System Clutch I.D. Item Number Description K H J I P Weight Per Piece S-L III KIP S-L III Double-T Void 3/4 1/16 5 5/16 1/16 3/ lbs To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. 49

50 Rapid Lift System Anchors A C RL-61 DOUBLE-T ANCHOR 4-Ton, 8-Ton and -Ton D The RL-61 Double-T Anchor is designed mainly to lift and handle precast single or double tees, but can also be used effectively on columns, beams, girders, etc. The recessed anchor allows quick and easy finishing; no lifting strands to cut or burn off, only a simple patch of the recess. The Double-T Anchor is available in plain and hot dip galvanize finish. Refer to the table for standard sizes and safe working loads. Longer lengths are available on special order. See Ring Clutches on page 5, 53, and 54, the Recessing Members on 55, 56 and 59. B Double-T Anchors are designed for use on 18 and deeper precast concrete Tee sections. Reference the table for standard sizes and dimensions. Longer legs can be provided on special order, but will not increase the allowable tension load of the anchor. E " RL-61 RAPID LIFT DOUBLE-T ANCHOR DATA Ring Clutch System 4T/5T 8T/10T 8T/10T T/6T Clutch I.D. 5T 10T 10T 6T Item Number HC A B C D E 1 1/" 3/8" 3/8" 3 1/8" 15 3/4" 3 1/4" 3 1/4" 30 3/4" 5/8" 3/4" 3/4" 1" 4" 4" 4" 4" 1/4" 3 1/" 3 3/4" 5 1/8" Allowable Tension Load 4:1 SF (lbs) 8,000 16,000 0,000 8,000 Ultimate Mechanical Load Tension (lbs) 3,000 64,000 80,000 1,000 Weight Per Piece (lbs) Tension values are based on 3,500 psi standard weight concrete. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. Optional Bullet T-Caps are available in bulk for field assembly or can be ordered installed on the anchor. For factory installation, it must be specified when ordering the anchors. Optional Bullet T-Cap Item no

51 MB Double Tee Anchor Double Tee 17 KIP and 0 KIP Anchor Optional Tie Back Weld Angle The new Meadow Burke DTA is three products in one: Up to 10-Ton DTA Lifting Unit with 40-Ton Ultimate Capacity An End Tee Bearing Plate with the same high capacities A Tie Back Connection at the top of the Tee Strand Spring Clip (use with.50 or.60 strand) DTA Recess Member and Accessories: The DTA Recess Member is manufactured using durable reusable plastic. When installed, the recess locks into the DTA lift head eye opening, securing it in place during concrete placement. The DTA and recess assembly is positioned just below the top of the pour, allowing the finishing equipment to pass over without interference. To remove the recess, simply press down on the small lid section and open the large lid section. Then spread the locking fins away from the lifting head and lift out recess. The generous draft on the sides of the recess, facilitate easy removal. 5-1/" 7-1/8" -1/" End View DTA Recess Member Magnetic Option: the DTA Magnets can be added to aid in securing the recess to a steel bulkhead form. One, two or three magnets may be added depending on the conditions. These are permanent magnets that can be reused after the plastic recess requires replacement. Simply remove the magnets and insert into the new DTA Recess. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Plastic Recess Member (48 per box) DTA Magnet (0 per box) Optional Magnets DTA Side View DOUBLE TEE ANCHOR ACCESSORIES PRODUCT CODE DTARM /4" WEIGHT (LBS) 3 (LBS) 1 (LBS) The MB Double Tee Lifting Anchor (DTA) is a three in one solution for end bearing, lifting / erection and tie back connections. Bearing: The ½ base plate of the DTA is also used as a bearing plate for the double tee. Lifting: The DTA is capable of ultimate mechanical loads of 80,000# each, yielding 0,000# SWL. Tie-Back: The DTA lift head and the optional Weld Angle facilitates an easy and efficient tie-back connection. Custom angles available. Additional Benefits: Standard and Custom Anchor Heights for any standard double tee or dapped tee. DTA Heights from 15.5 to 36 or more. Custom heights available. Full 80,000# ultimate all heights (Adequate tee end reinforcement design required see test data). DTA is completely recessed below top of tee: easier pouring, storing and shipping. Self Draining recess is opened to the end of tee. End connections are also recessed. No cutting or patching: may be covered with a precast curb or grouted. May be used to lift beams, lintels and spandrels. NOTE: Use with double row of strand only. For use with single row, convert to a stagger strand layout, by placing alternate stands on opposite sides of vertical lift plate of the DTA. To achieve the safe working load of the DTA, the double tee end must be properly reinforced to withstand loads from its own self-weight. A full test report is available online at Compatible Ring Clutches ITEM # (see page 5) ITEM # RL-35 RING CLUTCH 8 / 10 TONS PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 8/10 Ton Ring Clutch SUPER-LIFT III RING CLUTCH PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Super-Lift III Ring Clutch Assembly (see page 54) UNIT WEIGHT (LBS) UNIT WEIGHT (LBS) Engineered Lifting Systems 51

52 Rapid Lift System Ring Clutches RL-35 RING CLUTCH /.5-Ton, 4/5-Ton, 8/10-Ton and /6-Ton F E The RL-35 Ring Clutch is an assembly consisting of a main clutch body, a curved bolt/handle and bail. The design of the ring clutch allows a full 360 rotation of the bail around the main body. The installation of the unit is quick and easy; simply rotate the curved bolt/handle to the open position, drop the main body into the anchor recess and rotate the bolt/handle to the closed position. See page 54 for ring clutch bolt. See page 18 for ring clutch maintenance information. D A C B RL-35 RAPID LIFT RING CLUTCH DATA Ring Clutch Systems Clutch I.D. Item Number A B C D E F Weight Per Piece (lbs) Clutch Capacity (ton) T/.5T 4T/5T 1 8T/10T** T/6T *.5T 5T 10T 6T / /4 3 7/8 1 1/16 1 7/16 13/16 3 1/8 4 1/8 5 15/16 8 1/4 3/4 3 3/16 4 9/16 7 1/4 1/4 9/16 3 9/16 4 3/4 3 5/8 4 1/ 5 13/ / ) Super Lift II Ring Clutch may be used, if a longer handle is required. ) Available on special order or limited to quantity on hand. Special orders take 8 to 10 weeks. ** May be used with DTA (Double Tee Anchor), page 45. 3) Clutch capacities are rated at a 5:1 safety factor; and apply only to clutches manufactured after 1/1/000. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. 5

53 Rapid Lift System Ring Clutches RL-38 CABLE RING CLUTCH 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton and 8-Ton The RL-38 Ring Clutch Cable is identical in use to the standard ring clutch, but is fabricated with a wire cable bail for more versatility. It is often an effective answer for difficult lifting and rotation challenges. See page 1 and for additional ring clutch installation information. See page 18 for ring clutch maintenance information. B ø ø Engineered Lifting Systems A A RL-39 CABLE RING CLUTCH -Ton RL-38 Cable Ring Clutch 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton and 8-Ton The RL-39 Ring Clutch Cable is a heavy duty version of the cable ring clutch for use where high loads are present. See page 1 and for additional ring clutch installation information. See page 18 for ring clutch maintenance information. RL-39 Cable Ring Clutch -Ton Ring Clutch Item Clutch I.D.** Item Number A B System RL-38 RL-38 RL-38 RL-38 RL-39* 1T T 4T 8T T 1.5T.5T 5T 10T 6T RL-38 & RL-39 CABLE RING CLUTCH DATA CB 7900CB 79003CB 79170CB 1/" " 3 3/8" 7 3/4" 6" 8 1/4" 11 7/8" 11 3/4" 3/4" N/A Cable Diameter Ø 8 mm 14 mm 18 mm mm 3 mm Weight per Piece.0 lbs Clutch Capacity (ton) Available on special order or limited quantity on hand. Special orders take 8 to 10 weeks. Not to be used with High Capacity System Anchors. 3 Clutch capacities are rated at a 5:1 safety factor. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. 53

54 Rapid Lift System Ring Clutches RL-36 RING CLUTCH BOLT 1/1.5-Ton, /.5-Ton, 4/5-Ton, 8/10-Ton and /6-Ton The RL-36 Ring Clutch Bolt is available for replacement purposes, when required. Refer to the table for size and item number. Refer to page 18 for additional ring clutch maintenance information. Nominal Anchor Load 1T/1.5T T/.5T 4T & 5T 8T/10T T/6T RL-36 RING CLUTCH BOLT DATA Clutch I.D. 1.5T.5T 5T 10T 6T Item Number To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. F E SUPER-LIFT III RING CLUTCH The Super-Lift III Ring Clutch is an assembly consisting of a main clutch body, a curved bolt/handle and bail. It is very similar to the Rapid Lift Ring Clutch, but has a much longer handle. The installation of the unit is quick and easy; simply rotate the curved bolt/handle to the open position, drop the main body into the anchor recess and rotate the bolt/handle to the closed position. See pages 1 and for additional ring clutch installation information. See page 18 for ring clutch maintenance information. D A NOTE: May be used with DTA (Double Tee Anchors), page 51. C B SUPER LIFT III RING CLUTCH Ring Clutch Item Clutch I.D. A B C D E F System Number SL-III -Kip " 1-7/8" 5" 3-3/8" -3/4" 5" 1 Clutch capacities are rated at a 5:1 safety factor. Unit Weight Clutch Capacity 11 ton To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. 54

55 Rapid Lift System Recessing Members RL-40 RECESS MEMBER HOLE 1-Ton and 1.5-Ton only Blue Color The RL-40 Recess Member Hole is a reusable plastic unit furnished for use with the 1-Ton Rapid Lift. Erection methods are designed for architectural precasters. As with all Recess Members, it functions to attach the anchor to the form, protect the anchor recess during concrete placement and form a void to allow the lifting clutch to engage the head of the anchor. See page 18 for typical recess member installation and stripping information. H I J P Q Engineered Lifting Systems To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. K RL-40 RECESS MEMBER - HOLE Ring Clutch System Clutch I.D. Item Number Recess Color H I J K P Q Weight Per Piece (lbs) 1T/1.5T 1.5T Blue 1 1/8" 1 3/8" 3/8" 1/4" 1" 8 mm 0.1 RL-45 RECESS MEMBER 4 HOLE /.5-Ton, 4/5-Ton, 8/10-Ton and /6-Ton J P Q The RL-45 Recess Member 4 Hole is the standard reusable plastic recess plug used in most Rapid Lift applications. Refer to the table for sizes and color-coding. Note that the -Ton narrow (Red) recess member is for use only with the -Ton Spread Anchor and the -Ton Flat Foot Anchor. See page 18 for typical recess member installation and stripping information. H I K RL-45 RECESS MEMBER - 4 HOLE Ring Clutch System Clutch I.D. Item Number Recess Color H I J K P Q Weight Per Piece (lbs) T/.5T T/.5T 4T/5T 8T/10T T/6T 1.5T.5T 5T 10T T Yellow Red Orange Green Blue 1 11/16" 1 11/16" 1/16" 3 1/8" 4 9/16" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 5/16" 3 5/16" 4 5/8" 4 1/16" 4 1/16" 5 3/16" 7 13/3" 9 3/16" 3/8" 3/16" 5/8" 3/4" 1" 1 3/16" 1 3/16" 1 11/3" 1 31/3" 3/4" 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm mm mm/16mm ) Available on special order or limited quantity on hand. ) Use with the -Ton Spread Anchor (79050), -Ton Flat Foot Anchors (7905) and (79053). To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. 55

56 Rapid Lift System Recessing Members RL-50 RECESS MEMBER DISPOSABLE 4/5-Ton and 8-Ton/10-Ton J I The RL-50 Recess Member-Foam is available for use with the 4/5 and 8/10-Ton Rapid Lift applications and is simply nailed in place on the form. H RL-50 Foam Disposable Recess Member 4/5-Ton & 8/10-Ton K RL-50 FOAM DISPOSABLE RECESSING MEMBER DATA Ring Clutch System Clutch I.D. Item Number H I J K Weight Per Piece (lbs) 4T/5T 8T/10T 5T 10T /4 1/4 3/8 3 1/4 4 1/4 6 1/ 5/8 3/ RL-53 RECESS MEMBER DISPOSABLE /.5-Ton, 4/5-Ton and 8/10-Ton The RL-53 Recess Member Disposable is available for use with the /.5, 4/5 and 8/10-Ton Rapid Lift applications. 8 / 10 ton plastic disposable recess members utilize a 3/8 diameter coil nut embedded in the member for attachment purposes. J P Q J P Q H I H I K K RL-53 Plastic Disposable Recess Member /.5-Ton & 4/5-Ton RL-53 Plastic Disposable Recess Member 8/10-Ton with 3/8 coil attachment nut and magnetic holding plate. RL-53 PLASTIC DISPOSABLE RECESSING MEMBER DATA Ring Clutch System Clutch I.D. Item Number Recess Color H I J K P Q Weight Per Piece (lbs) T/.5 4T/5T* 4T/5T 8T/10T.5T 5T 5T 10T Yellow Yellow Yellow Green *Use with erection head anchors and tech erection anchors. " 1/" 7/8" 3 1/8" 1 1/" 1/4" " 3 1/4" 3 5/16" 4 5/16" 4 1/4" 7 7/8" 3/8" 5/8" 5/8" 13/16" 1 1/" 1 1/3" N/A 1 31/3" 5/16" 1/" N/A 1/" To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. 56

57 Rapid Lift System Accessories RL-46 HOLDING PLATE 1/1.5-Ton, /.5-Ton, 4/5-Ton, 8/10-Ton and /6-Ton The RL-46 Holding Plate can be used in various ways to attach and firmly hold a recess member to the form. It can be nailed or screwed to the form utilizing the furnished holes in the plate. For a permanent, reusable application involving metal forms, the holding plate can be welded in place. For a quick onceoff application, the holding plate can be held in place with a good commercial grade double-back tape. Q Engineered Lifting Systems Centering it over the protruding pins of the holding plate and sliding the recess member onto the pins, easily accomplishes recess member installation. See additional installation and stripping information on pages 18 and 19. Ring Clutch System 1T/1.5 T/.5 4T/5T 8T/10 T/6T Clutch I.D. 1.5T.5T 5T 10T T RL-46 HOLDING PLATE DATA Item Number Q 8 mm 10 mm 10 mm mm 16 mm Weight Per Piece 0.15 lbs To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. RAPID LIFT HOLDING PLATE MAGNETIC 8/10-Ton The Holding Plate Magnetic is available to quickly set and securely hold a Rapid Lift anchor in a metal form without hole drilling or welding. Ring Clutch System RAPID LIFT HOLDING PLATE - MAGNETIC Clutch I.D. Item Number Q Material 8T/10 10T /8" Steel 0.5 Weight (lbs) Q To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. 57

58 Rapid Lift System Accessories RAPID LIFT BOLTS/WING NUTS The Rapid Lift System provides various types of attachment bolts for attaching recess members to the form. Selection depends on application and/or personal preference. RL-47 L-Rod Style is available for use with 1/1.5, /.5, 4/5, 8/10 and /6-Ton plastic recess members. It functions much the same as the wing nut style above, but utilizes an L shaped handle to thread the unit. Refer to the table for applicable thread size. RL-48 Wing Nut Style Bolt is available for use with 1/1.5, /.5, 4/5, 8/10 and /6-Ton plastic recess members. It is installed by inserting the bolt through the form and threaded into the recess member. It also draws the recess member tight to the form utilizing the free-running wing nut. Refer to the table for applicable thread size. RL-47 L L RL-48 Ring Clutch System 1T/1.5 T/.5 4T/5T 8T/10 T/6T RL-47 & RL-48 L-ROD/BOLT & WING NUT ASSEMBLY Clutch I.D. 1.5T.5T 5T 10T T Item Number L 6 3/8 5 7/8 5 7/8 5 7/8 6 9/16 D 8MM 3/8 coil 3/8 coil MM 16MM Weight Per Piece (lbs) To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. RL-49 Bayonet Style Bolt is available for use with /.5, 4/5, 8/10and /6-Ton plastic recess members. It is installed by inserting the bolt through the form into the back of the recess member. It is given a 90 turn with the fixed wing nut at the end of the bolt and the recess member is drawn tight to the form with the free-running wing nut. Refer to the table for applicable thread size. L RL-49 Ring Clutch System T/.5 4T/5T 8T/10 T/6T RL-49 BOLT & WING NUT BAYONET ASSEMBLY Clutch I.D..5T 5T 10T T Item Number L /8 6 5/8 D 8MM 8MM MM MM Weight Per Piece (lbs) To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. 58

59 Rapid Lift System Recessing Members RL-55 RECESS MEMBER STEEL /.5-Ton, 4/5-Ton, 8/10-Ton and /6-Ton The RL-55 Recess Member Steel is designed for high re-use applications and/or where heavy pressure and temperatures are encountered. Replacement wedges and foam strips are available, see below. See typical installation and stripping information on page 0. I J K H Engineered Lifting Systems RL-55 RAPID LIFT STEEL/IRON RECESSING MEMBERS Ring Clutch System Clutch I.D. Item Number H I J K Weight Per Piece (lbs) T/.5 4T/5T 8T/10 T/6T.5T 5T 10T T /16 1 7/8 3/4 4 1/ 1 11/16 1/4 3 1/4 4 3/ /16 7 1/4 8 7/8 1/ coil 1/ coil 16 mm 16 mm To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. RL-57 STEEL RECESS MEMBER WEDGE /.5-Ton, 4/5-Ton, 8/10-Ton and /6-Ton The RL-57 Wedge is available when replacement is required. It is used in conjunction with the steel recess member to firmly capture and hold the anchor in the recess member. See data below. RL-57 RECESS MEMBER WEDGE DATA Ring Clutch System Clutch I.D. Item Number Weight Per Piece (lbs) T/.5 4T/5T 8T/10 T/6T.5T 5T 10T T To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. RL-59 STEEL RECESS MEMBER FOAM STRIP /.5-Ton, 4/5-Ton, 8/10-Ton and /6-Ton The RL-59 Foam Strip is available in bulk for use in conjunction with the steel recess member. Refer to page 14 for additional steel recess member installation information. Packaged and sold in carton lots only. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. Ring Clutch System T/.5 4T/5T 8T/10 T/6T RL-59 RECESS MEMBER FOAM STRIP DATA Clutch I.D..5T 5T 10T T Item Number Pkg./Ctn Weight Per Package (lbs)

60 Rapid Lift Bolts/Wing Nuts RL-58 Wing Nut Coil Bolt is used with /.5, 4/5, 8/10 and /6-Ton steel recess members. It functions the same as the wing nut bolt above. Refer to the table on the following page for applicable thread size. L RL-67 L-Rod Coil Bolt is used with /.5, 4/5, 8/10 and /6-Ton steel recess members. It functions the same as the Wing Nut Coil Bolt above. Refer to the table on the following page for applicable thread size. RL-58 RL-58 & RL-67 COIL BOLT & BOLT WING NUT ASSEMBLY Ring Clutch System T/.5 4T/5T 8T/10 T/6T Clutch I.D..5T 5T 10T T Item Number L 5 3/4 5 3/4 6 9/16 6 9/16 D 1/ coil 1/ coil 16MM 16MM Weight Per Piece (lbs) RL-67 L To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. RAPID LIFT PRECAST PATCH /.5-Ton, 4/5-Ton and 8/10-Ton The Precast Patch is designed as a simple alternative to patching the recess formed by the anchor void. The plastic patch installs quickly and gives a long-lasting seal with a matte finish, in case painting is required. One size fits all, Item Number 456. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. RAPID LIFT SEALING COVER /.5-Ton, 4/5-Ton, 8/10-Ton and /6-Ton The Rapid Lift Sealing Cover is a strong, lightweight plug available as a temporary cover for cast in place Rapid Lift anchors. RAPID LIFT SEALING COVER T/.5 4T/5T 8T/10 T/6T To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. 60

61 MB DogBone Lifting System The Meadow Burke DogBone Lifting System is a quality system designed to lift and handle the concrete elements quickly, safely and economically. This versatile system offers effortless lifter to anchor attachment and disconnect in a wide range of capabilities. Engineered Lifting Systems 61

62 MB DogBone System Technical Information LIFTING BODY/CLUTCH MAINTENANCE Meadow Burke recommends that users of the DogBone System schedule regular inspections to determine the safe usability of the lifting units. If any factor is present that may affect or compromise the safety performance of the unit, such as excess wear, overloading, misuse, alteration, application of heat, etc., the unit must be serviced or permanently removed from service. Under no circumstance should the unit be modified, heated, welded or filed. Do not attempt to straighten a bent eye link. Bent eye links should be replaced with a new eye link and new pivot p Replacement parts are available through your nearest Meadow Burke office. ASSEMBLING THE DOGBONE PLASTIC RECESS FORMER AND ANCHOR Recess formers and anchors can easily be assembled. Simply squeeze the recess former across the flat surface to open the recess former in a clamshell effect. Insert the anchor into the opening and release the pressure on the recess former. This allows the recess former to close around the head of the anchor and securely hold it in place. DOGBONE PLASTIC RECESS FORMER STRIPPING Once the form has been removed to expose the recess former, insert two small rods or two screw drivers into the two holes provided in the recess former. A scissoring action with the two implements will lift one side of the recess former. Grasp the lifted side of the recess former and pull the unit out of the concrete. ASSEMBLING THE DOGBONE STEEL RECESS FORMER AND ANCHOR Begin the assembly by placing a steel recess former grommet around the shaft of the anchor. Slide the grommet up against the head of the anchor and insert the anchor into the bottom of the steel recess former. Make certain that the grommet seals the hole in the recess former. 6

63 MB DogBone System Technical Information SETTING THE ANCHOR/RECESS FORMER ASSEMBLY Run the recess former bolt through a properly placed drilled hole in the form. Draw the recess former bolt tight to the form with a free-running wing nut. The exposed end of the anchor can be tied to the rebar mat or supported by a rebar support. Anchor Tied To Reinforcing Steel Steel Form Rubber Grommett Engineered Lifting Systems Anchor Steel Recess Plug LIFTING CLUTCH INSTALLATION Anchor attachment Turn the lifting clutch upside down, positioned and centered over the head of the anchor. Drop the lifting clutch down into the void formed by the recess former. Rotate the lifting unit around the head of the anchor until the unit contacts the surface of the concrete. Installation is complete, ready to lift. BAIL POSITIONING Always position the lifting cable directly over the lifting clutch to avoid alignment problems 63

64 MB DogBone System Technical Information MB DOGBONE ANCHORS USED IN THIN WALL SECTIONS Care must be taken when locating anchors in thin wall sections. Improper installation and/or misalignment can seriously reduce the safe working load of the anchor. A minimum concrete coverage underneath the foot of the anchor of 1 has to be established in order to achieve the published values. Anchors must be positioned on the centerline of the panel. Use rebar supports, spacers or tie the anchor to the rebar mat to make certain of proper positioning. Panel C.L. Panel C.L. Te Te Te This sketch shows a misaligned, improperly positioned anchor. The actual edge distance (Te) is considerably reduced so there must be a corresponding reduction in the safe working load of the anchor. This sketch shows proper positioning of the anchor on the centerline of the panel. This allows the full wall thickness to be used in the safe working load selection. The sketch below shows an anchor application and corner relationship. Safe working loads for indicated corner distances are displayed in the following table. Wall Thickness Te Minimum Corner Distance Te = Actual Edge Thickness (1/ Wall Thickness) 64

65 MB DogBone System Anchors DB 5 MB DOGBONE ANCHOR 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 6-Ton, 8-Ton, -Ton and 16-Ton in Face Lift Applications All DB-5 DogBone Anchors are manufactured from high quality, high strength steel. They are continually tested at a specified sampling rate during production and each anchor head is clearly marked with its safe working load. Engineered Lifting Systems The accompanying table shows standard anchor sizes and safe working loads in various concrete strengths. Note that in some cases the anchor does not reach full capacity in the lower strength concretes. This is an important consideration when selecting the proper anchor application. In general, concrete strengths of,100 psi to 3,500 psi are necessary to develop stated anchor safe working loads. The safe working loads displayed in the table applies for any directional loading. Loading on the anchor can be perpendicular, horizontal or any angle in between. DB-5 MB DOGBONE ANCHOR CAPACITIES WHEN USED IN FACE OF FLAT SLAB Anchor Size Concrete Strength 1500 PSI 500 PSI 3500 PSI 5000 PSI Edge Distance Tension (in) Edge Distance Shear (in) 1T x -1/ 1T x 3-3/8 1T x 4-3/4 T x -3/16 T x 3-3/8 T x 4-3/4 T x 5-1/ T x 6-3/4 T x 11 4T x 3-3/4 4T x 4-1/4 4T x 4-3/4 4T x 5-1/ 4T x 7-1/8 4T x 9-1/ 4T x 13-3/8 8T x 4-3/4 8T x 6-3/4 8T x 10 8T x 13-3/8 16T x 9-7/8 16T x 19-5/ ) All safety factors are approx. 4:1. ) No safety factors in this table have been reduced to achieve higher working loads. 3) 16 ton SWL are at full 4:1 safety factors in compliance with ACI 347 and OSHA. Complies with ASTM-57. 4) Minimum corner distance = 1.5* edge distance for shear loaded towards the edge. A minimum concrete coverage underneath the foot of the anchor of 1 has to be established in order to achieve the published values. To order, specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. 65

66 MB DogBone System Anchors DB-5 DOGBONE ANCHOR EDGE LIFT APPLICATIONS In edge lift applications the DogBone Anchor must be used in combination with two properly installed shear bars. The shear bars (anchor and cup) transfer a portion of the shear stress back into the anchor and into the concrete panel. Note: in this application the sling angle must be perpendicular to the surface of the concrete. See the Shear Bar Anchor on page 77 and the Shear Bar Cup on page 77. P1 Shear Bar Recess Cup Shear Bar Anchor Chair T 4T 8T 6-3/4 6-3/4 6-3/4 9-1/ 9-1/ 13-3/8 13-3/8 DB-5 EDGE LIFTING WITH MB DOGBONE ANCHORS Anchor Size M Anchor Length M Wall Thickness Top Edge Distance (T E ) / 3 3-1/ 3-1/ / Min Corner Distance Shear SWL 4:1 Safety Factor 1 1 Minimum concrete strength at 4000 psi. See above for proper anchor location and required reinforcing. A minimum concrete coverage underneath the foot of the anchor of 1 has to be established in order to achieve the published values SINGLE DOGBONE ANCHOR TENSILE CAPACITIES IN THIN WALL SECTIONS DB Anchor Ton & Length 1 Ton X 4 3/4" DB-5 1-TON TENSILE CAPACITY Critical Wall Thickness (in) Actual Edge Thickness Te (in) Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor (lbs) Corner Distance (in) inches inches 8 inches inches 18 inches 4 inches 30 inches 1/" 3/4" 3" 3 1/" 4" 4 1/" 1 1/4" 1 3/8" 1 1/" 1 3/4" " 1/4" 1000 lbs Safety Factor is approximately 4:1 in 4500 psi concrete. A minimum concrete coverage underneath the foot of the anchor of 1 has to be established in order to achieve the published values. 00 lbs lbs lbs lbs DB Anchor Ton & Length Ton X 6 3/4" Ton X 11" DB-5 -TON TENSILE CAPACITY Critical Wall Thickness (in) Actual Edge Thickness Te (in) Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor (lbs) Corner Distance (in) inches inches 6 inches inches 18 inches 4 inches 30 inches 3" 3 1/4" 3 1/" 4" 5" 6" 3" 3 1/4" 3 1/" 4" 5" 6" 1 1/" 1 5/8" 1 3/4" " 1/" 3" 1 1/" 1 5/8" 1 3/4" " 1/" 3" 1700 lbs Safety Factor is approximately 4:1 in 4500 psi concrete. A minimum concrete coverage underneath the foot of the anchor of 1 has to be established in order to achieve the published values lbs lbs lbs lbs

67 MB DogBone System Anchors DB-5 SINGLE DOGBONE ANCHOR TENSILE CAPACITIES IN THIN WALL SECTIONS (cont.) DB Anchor Ton & Length 4 Ton X 9 1/" 4 Ton X 13 3/8" 8 Ton X 6 3/4" DB-5 4-TON & 8-TON TENSILE CAPACITY (cont.) Critical Wall Thickness (in) Actual Edge Thickness Te (in) Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor (lbs) Corner Distance (in) inches inches 10 inches 15 inches 0 inches 4 inches 30 inches 3 3/4" 4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 3 3/4" 4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 4 3/4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 10" 1 7/8" " 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 1 7/8" " 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 3/8" 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 5" 900 lbs Safety Factor is approximately 4:1 in 4500 psi concrete. A minimum concrete coverage underneath the foot of the anchor of 1 has to be established in order to achieve the published values. 300 lbs lbs lbs lbs Engineered Lifting Systems DB Anchor Ton & Length 8 Ton X 13 3/8" 16 Ton X 9 7/8" 16 Ton X 19 5/8" DB-5 8-TON & 16-TON TENSILE CAPACITY Critical Wall Thickness (in) Actual Edge Thickness Te (in) Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor (lbs) Corner Distance (in) inches inches inches 18 inches 4 inches 36 inches 45 inches 5" 6" 7" 8" 10" " 6 1/" 7" 8" 10" " 14" 6 1/" 7" 8" 10" " 14" 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 5" 6" 3 1/4" 3 1/" 4" 5" 6" 7" 3 1/4" 3 1/" 4" 5" 6" 7" 4800 lbs , ,000 11, ,500 14,000 16,00 Safety Factor is approximately 4:1 in 4500 psi concrete. A minimum concrete coverage underneath the foot of the anchor of 1 has to be established in order to achieve the published values lbs ,700 13, ,100, ,000 11,00 14,300 17,300 0, lbs ,300 14, ,900 13,700 10,500 11,500 13,000 16,000 0,000 3, lbs ,900 13,600 16, ,00 13,300 15,400 11,500,500 14,400 18,000 1,500 5, lbs ,00 11,700 14,600 16, ,00 13,400 15,400,00 13,00 15,100 19,000,800 6,

68 MB DogBone System Anchors MULTIPLE MB DOGBONE ANCHORS TENSILE CAPACITIES IN THIN WALL SECTIONS When multiple anchors are placed in a thin wall panel, caution must be exercised to prevent the anchor shear cone planes from overlapping. If overlapping is unavoidable, the anchor safe working load must be reduced. If a spacing of six times the length of the anchor, or more, is maintained the anchor shear cones will not overlap and maximum tensile capacities can be achieved. Reference the following table. P P P ALTERNATE CONE AREA OVERLAPPING RESULTS IN DRASTIC SWL REDUCTIONS MINIMUM CORNER DISTANCE (3 L) SPACING (LESS THAN 6 L) L CONCRETE REDUCTION FACTORS All safe working loads shown in this section are based on 4,500 psi strength concrete. For use in lower strength concrete apply the appropriate reduction factor. Multiply the calculated values from the following table by the appropriate reduction factor to arrive at the proper safe working load for the lower strength concrete. PSI CONCRETE REDUCTION FACTORS DATA Concrete Strength MPa Reduction Factors Safety Factor is approximately 4:1 in 4500 psi concrete. A minimum concrete coverage underneath the foot of the anchor of 1 has to be established in order to achieve the published values

69 MB DogBone System Anchors DB-5 MULTIPLE MB DOGBONE ANCHORS TENSILE CAPACITIES IN THIN WALL SECTIONS (Cont.) DB Anchor Ton & Length 1 Ton X 4 3/4" DB-5 1-TON TENSILE CAPACITY Critical Wall Thickness (in) Actual Edge Thickness Te (in) Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor (lbs) Anchor Spacing (in) inches inches inches 18 inches 4 inches 30 inches 36 inches 1/" 3/4" 3" 3 1/ " 4" 4 1/" 1/4" 1 3/8" 1 1/" 1 3/4" " 1/4" 800 lbs Safety Factor is approximately 4:1 in 4500 psi concrete. A minimum concrete coverage underneath the foot of the anchor of 1 has to be established in order to achieve the published values. DB Anchor Ton & Length Ton X 6 3/4" Ton X 11" DB Anchor Ton & Length 4 Ton X 9 1/" 4 Ton X 13 3/8" 8 Ton X 6 3/4" 8 Ton X 13 3/8" Safety Factor is approximately 4:1 in 4500 psi concrete. A minimum concrete coverage underneath the foot of the anchor of 1 has to be established in order to achieve the published values. 900 lbs lbs lbs lbs DB-5 -TON TENSILE CAPACITY Critical Wall Thickness (in) Actual Edge Thickness Te (in) Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor (lbs) Anchor Spacing (in) inches inches 18 inches 4 inches 30 inches 36 inches 48 inches 3" 3 1/4" 3 1/" 4" 5" 6" 3" 3 1/4" 3 1/" 4" 5" 6" DB-5 4-TON & 8-TON TENSILE CAPACITY Critical Wall Actual Edge Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor (lbs) Thickness (in) Thickness Te (in) Anchor Spacing (in) inches inches 18 inches 4 inches 36 inches 48 inches 60 inches 3 3/4" 4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 3 3/4" 4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 4 3/4" 5" 6" 7" 8" 10" 5" 6" 7" 8" 10" 11" 1 1/" 1 5/8" 1 3/4" " 1/" 3" 1 1/" 1 5/8" 1 3/4" " 1/" 3" 1 7/8" " 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 1 7/8" " 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 3/8" 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 5" 1/" 3" 3 1/" 4" 5" 5 1/" 1400 lbs Safety Factor is approximately 4:1 in 4500 psi concrete. A minimum concrete coverage underneath the foot of the anchor of 1 has to be established in order to achieve the published values lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs Engineered Lifting Systems 69

70 MB DogBone System Anchors DB-5 MULTIPLE MB DOGBONE ANCHORS TENSILE CAPACITIES IN THIN WALL SECTIONS (Cont.) DB Anchor Ton & Length 16 Ton X 9 7/8" 16 Ton X 19 5/8" DB-5 16-TON TENSILE CAPACITY Critical Wall Thickness (in) Actual Edge Thickness Te (in) Tensile Safe Working Load Per Anchor (lbs) Anchor Spacing (in) inches inches 0 inches 4 inches 33 inches 4 inches 60 inches 6 1/" 7" 8" 10" " 14" 6 1/" 7" 8" 10" " 14" 3 1/4" 3 1/" 4" 5" 6" 7" 3 1/4" 3 1/" 4" 5" 6" 7" 3300 lbs Safety Factor is approximately 4:1 in 4500 psi concrete. A minimum concrete coverage underneath the foot of the anchor of 1 has to be established in order to achieve the published values lbs lbs , ,500, lbs , ,00 14,600 17, lbs ,900 13, ,400 14,300 17,100 0,000 DB-53 MB DOGBONE EYE ANCHOR 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 8-Ton, and 16-Ton in Edge Lift Applications The DB-53 DogBone Eye Anchor is used in combination with a DB-60 DogBone Rebar Reinforcing P This combination allows tension loads to be distributed deeply into the concrete element and produce high safe working loads in thin wall sections. DogBone Eye Anchors must be installed properly, centered and plumb to avoid drastic reduction of safe working load. Anchor Load Rating Tons 1-Ton -Ton 4-Ton 8-Ton 16-Ton Anchor Length L DB-53 MB DOGBONE Eye Anchor/Rebar Selection Table Minimum Panel Thickness Safety Factor is approximately 4:1. 1) Minimum concrete compressive strength, f c = 000 psi (14 MPa). ) Safe work loads shown are based on Anchors with DB-60 rebar reinforcing installed. Minimum Corner Distance Safe Work Load Tension w/ Rebar Minimum Anchor Spacing mm mm mm lbs. kn mm -5/8 3-1/ 4-3/4 7-1/8 9-7/ / To order, specify: quantity, name, item number and finish ,000 3,

71 MB DogBone System Anchors DB-60 DOGBONE REBAR REINFORCING PIN 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 8-Ton, and 16-Ton in Edge Lift Applications The DogBone Rebar Reinforcing Pin is used with the DB-53 DogBone Eye Anchor to distribute tension stress deeply into the precast concrete panel. R Engineered Lifting Systems Anchor Load Rating Tons 1-Ton -Ton 4-Ton 8-Ton 16-Ton DB-60 MB DOGBONE REBAR REINFORCEMENT SPECIFICATIONS Rebar Grade 60 Diameter.306 #3 #5 #6 # Rebar Overall Length Rebar Spread S Rebar Bending Radius R /std. mm mm mm mm 3/4 1-1/4-1/ S To order, specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. DB-60 DogBone Rebar Reinforcing Pins must be used with DB-53 DogBone Eye Anchors in order to achieve posted safe working loads. WALL THICKNESS MINIMUM ANCHOR SPACING Anchors must be centered and plumb when installed. Any deviation can result in a reduction of safe working loads. See additional anchor installation information on page 70. DB-53 MINIMUM CORNER DISTANCE C.L. OF WALL & ANCHOR(S) 71

72 MB DogBone System Lifting Hardware DB-1 DOGBONE LIFTING CLUTCH 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 8-Ton, 16-Ton, 5-Ton and 36-Ton The DB-1 MB DogBone Lifting Clutch consists of a round main body with a protruding lever arm and a high strength bail. The main body has a T slot that engages the head of a MB DogBone Anchor. The combined rotation capabilities of the main body and the bail allows a precast panel to be lifted, turned, tilted and/or rotated while under load. See lifting body maintenance information on page 6. T B A C G L H M DB-1 DOGBONE LIFTING CLUTCH Lifting Body Mark Safe Work Load A B C G H T L M Tons lbs. kn mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm T T T T T T T Safe working loads provide an approximate 5:1 safety factor. 1) Available on special order. To order, specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. 7

73 MB DogBone System Lifting Hardware DB- MB DOGBONE LIFTING BODY CHAIN LINK 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 8-Ton and 16-Ton The DB- MB DogBone Lifting Body Chain Link is similar to the eye link version, but utilizes a chain link arrangement to increase the unit s versatility. The chain link allows the unit to be loaded in any direction. See lifting body maintenance information on page 6. Engineered Lifting Systems D H L E DB- DOGBONE LIFTING BODY - WITH CHAIN LINK Lifting Body Mark Safe Work Load D L E H Tons lbs. kn mm mm mm mm T T T T T Safe working loads provide an approximate 5:1 safety factor. To order, specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. 73

74 MB DogBone System Lifting Hardware DB-3 MB DOGBONE LIFTING BODY EYE LINK 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 8-Ton and 16-Ton The DB-3 MB DogBone Lifting Body Eye Link is designed with a T shaped slot in the body of the lifter that engages the head of a DogBone Anchor. Attached to the main body is the solid plate eye link. It rotates about a pin in the main body so rigging does not have to be reversed when rotating a panel. See lifting body maintenance information on page 6. W D EYE LINK H C S T L E DB-3 DOGBONE LIFTING BODY LIFTING BODY WITH LINK Lifting Body Mark Safe Work Load W D C L E H S T Tons lbs. kn mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm T T T T T Safe working loads provide an approximate 5:1 safety factor. To order, specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. 74

75 MB DogBone System Recess Formers DB-6 DB-5 MB DOGBONE RECESS FORMER 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 8-Ton, -Ton and 16-Ton The DB-5 DogBone Recess Former is a reusable unit furnished with a threaded stud and wing nut. The threaded stud extends through the form and the accompanying wing nut secures the unit to the form. Removal of the form is required to expose the embedded anchor. See installation information on page 6. H C Engineered Lifting Systems DB-6 MB DOGBONE THREAD BOLT/PLATE The DB-6 DogBone Thread Bolt/Plate is an available replacement for the threaded stud of the DB-5 DogBone Recess Former, shown above. R D DogBone Anchor Size 1 Ton Ton 4 Ton 6 Ton 8 Ton Ton 16 Ton D Anchor Shank Diameter In 3/8 9/16 3/4 15/16 1-1/8 1-3/8 1-1/ mm DB-5 ANCHOR & RECESS FORMER DIMENSIONAL DATA CHART H Anchor Head Diameter In 3/4 1 1/3 1-7/16 1-7/8 1-7/8-3/4-3/4 To order, specify: quantity, name, item number and finish. mm F Anchor Foot Diameter In 1 1-3/8-3/8-3/4 3-3/8 3-7/8 mm In 3/8 7/16 9/16 9/16 9/16 9/16 9/16 C Cover mm Diameter of Recess Former In -3/ /4 4-3/4 4-3/4 6-3/8 6-3/8 mm Height of Recess Former (R) In 1-3/16 1-9/16 1-7/8-5/16-5/16 3-1/8 3-1/8 mm F DB-10 MB DOGBONE RECESS FORMER STEEL 1-Ton, -Ton and 4-Ton The DB-10 DogBone Recess Former Steel is designed for multiple use steel forms. A single threaded bolt firmly positions and holds the recess former to the form. See installation information on page 6. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and system size. DB-11 MB DOGBONE RECESS GROMMET 1-Ton, -Ton and 4-Ton The DB-11 DogBone Recess Grommet is used with the DB-10 DogBone Recess Former Steel to hold and seal the head of the DogBone Anchor in the recess former. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and system size. 75

76 MB DogBone System Recess Formers DB-15 DB-15 MB DOGBONE RECESS FORMER MAGNETIC DB-16 MB DOGBONE RECESS FORMER MAGNETIC 1-Ton, -Ton and 4-Ton DB-16 The DB-15 and DB-16 DogBone Recess Former - Magnetic are available for quick and easy reusable applications where steel precast forms are being used. The only difference in the two models is the DB-15 has three magnets and the DB-16 has six magnets for increased holding strength. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and system size. DB-18 MB DOGBONE RECESS FORMER NARROW W/STUD 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 6-Ton, 8-Ton, -Ton and 16-Ton The DB-18 DogBone Recess Former Narrow with stud is a reusable unit furnished with a threaded stud and wing nut. The threaded stud extends through the form and the accompanying wing nut secures the unit to the form. Removal of the form is required to expose the embedded anchor. See recess former dimensions on next page. See installation information on page 6. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and system size. DB-19 MB DOGBONE RECESS FORMER NARROW W/THREADED HOLE 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 6-Ton, 8-Ton, -Ton and 16-Ton The DB-19 DogBone Recess Former Narrow with threaded hole is a reusable unit that utilizes the removable DB-5 Star Stud to fasten it to the form. By simply removing the threaded stud after the concrete has set will allow the precast unit to be removed from the form and expose the recess former. See DB-5 MB DogBone Stud on page 77. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and system size. DogBone Anchor Size DB- MB DOGBONE RECESS FORMER W/INSIDE THREADS 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 8-Ton, -Ton and 16-Ton DB-19 SLIM RECESS FORMERS 1 Ton Ton 4 Ton 6 Ton 8 Ton Ton 16 Ton W Recess Former Dim. mm -3/ /4 4-3/4 4-3/4 6-3/8 6-3/ T Recess Former Dim. mm 1-9/16-3/4 3-3/8 3-3/ W All other dimensions are the same as the standard DogBone Recess Former. T The reusable DB- DogBone Recess Former with inside threads utilizes a removable DB-5 Star Stud to fasten it to the form. By simply removing the threaded stud after the concrete has set will allow the precast unit to be removed from the form and expose the recess former. See DB-5 MB DogBone Stud on page 77. DB- ANCHOR & RECESS FORMER DIMENSIONAL DATA CHART DogBone Anchor Size 1 Ton Ton 4 Ton 6 Ton 8 Ton Ton 16 Ton Diameter of Recess Former -3/ /4 4-3/4 4-3/4 6-3/8 6-3/8 mm Height of Recess Former (R) 1-3/16 1-9/16 1-7/8-5/16-5/16 3-1/8 3-1/8 mm To Order, Specify: quantity, name and system size. 76

77 MB DogBone System Recess Formers DB-4 MB DOGBONE THREADED NUT 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 8-Ton, -Ton and 16-Ton The DB-4 DogBone Threaded Nut is available as a replacement part for use on DB-19 Recess Former Narrow W/Threaded Hole and DB- Recess Former W/Inside Threads. Engineered Lifting Systems To Order, Specify: quantity, name and system size. DB-5 MB DOGBONE STUD 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 8-Ton, -Ton and 16-Ton The DB-5 DogBone Stud is available for use with DB-19 Recess Former Narrow W/Threaded Hole and DB- Recess Former W/Inside Threads. It has one fixed wing nut and one free-running wing nut for easy attachment to the recess former and to draw the recess form tight to the form. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and system size. DB-6 MB DOGBONE WING NUT 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 8-Ton, -Ton and 16-Ton DB-5 The DB-6 DogBone Wing Nut is available as a system replacement part. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and system size (DB-31 MB DOGBONE SHEAR BAR ANCHOR DB-33 MB DOGBONE SHEAR BAR CUP 1-Ton, -Ton, 4-Ton, 6-Ton and 8-Ton DB-6 The DB-31 DogBone Shear Bar Anchor and DB-33 DogBone Shear Bar Cup are used in conjunction with the DB-5 DogBone Anchor when performing an edge lift. Without the shear bars, the lifting stress may be applied to the concrete above the anchor and cause concrete spalling. The properly installed shear bars transfer the lifting stress back into the anchor and the lower concrete, thus preventing the spalling. Anchor Rated Load 1T T T 4T 6T 8T Slab Thickness / 7-1/ 10 mm DB-31 ANCHOR SHEAR BAR DATA A mm / /16 11/16 To Order, Specify: quantity, name and system size. 7/8 1-1/16 1-1/4 B H (Height) Deformed Wire Dia. mm mm mm / /8-5/8 3-7/16 3-1/ 4-7/ Anchor Rated Load 1T T T 4T 6T 8T DB-33 CUP SHEAR BAR DATA Slab Thickness A B H (Height) Deformed Wire Dia. D mm mm mm mm mm / / / 7-1/ /4 4-3/4 4-3/ / 5-5/8 6-1/8 7-3/ H ANCHOR SHEAR BAR A B A A B A H = 1/ SLAB + 1/ ANCHOR WIDTH - 3/4" (FOR 3/4" CLEARANCE) H.375 WIRE CUP SHEAR BAR 77

78 MB DogBone System Anchors with Recess Members MB DOGBONE WITH DISPOSABLE RECESS MEMBER -Ton, 4-Ton and 8-Ton The MB DogBone Anchor comes prepackaged with an installed disposable recess member for simpler installation. No longer will you need to keep up with a reusable member and maintain them prior to installation. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and system size. 78

79 Utility Lifting Systems Hook-Lift The Hook-Lift Utility Lifting System is simple in design and construction, yet is exceptionally strong and versatile in application. It can be used in face lift or edge lift applications and requires no additional reinforcement or special lifting hardware. Lifting and handling can be accomplished using a 6-ton grade B alloy hoist hook, a 7-ton forged alloy shackle clevis connector or the Meadow Burke Super-Lift III Ring Clutch. The Hook-Lift Utility Lifting System meets or exceeds OSHA and NPCA guidelines. 79

80 V-Anchor Lifting System Technical Information V-ANCHOR LIFTING SYSTEM The MB V-Anchor System is the most thoroughly tested clutch-less system available. Complete independent tests included various concrete strengths, slab thicknesses, shear and tension, and results with both the 5-Ton and the larger 7-Ton Hook Recess Members. The MB V-Anchor System is the safest and most reliable clutch less system available. The testing insures the engineer has the data and performance information needed for proper anchor and recess selection for the conditions of use. The MB V-Anchor System was developed and tested with considerations for all normal installations. Meadow Burke Engineering is available to assist with any unusual application or use. V-Anchors are available in plain and hot-dipped galvanized. 60º Optional Pipe Mesh Clips can be added to the V-Anchors to facilitate attachment to pipe mesh. Clip positioning is optimized and custom to plant specifications. Diameter A 7.75" L x 3.00" W 10.50" L x 3.03" W B 3.7" 3.5" MBV4444 MBV5444 MBV6444 V-Anchor Wire Diameter 0.444" MB Item MB Description Wire Diameter MB V-Anchor MB V-Anchor MB V-Anchor Slab Thickness Anchor Height (A) Anchor Spread (B) 1. Minimum edge distance for tension is X anchor depth and 18" for shear.. 5 ton and 7 ton recess void formers provide a 5/8" anchor setback from the concrete surface. 4" 5" 6" ø V-Anchor Capacities Using 5-Ton Hook Recess Color: Orange ø V-Anchor Capacities Using 7-Ton Hook Recess Color: Black 500 PSI 4000 PSI 500 PSI 4000 PSI Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear 1,970 3,00 4,90 Safe Working Load (lbs) 4:1 Safe Working Load (lbs) 4:1 3,900 5,140 6,450,490 3,80 5,430 4,940 6,510 8,170 1,70,70 3,430,160 4,70 5,680,170 3,440 4, " L x 3.00" W 10.50" L x 3.03" W,730 5,970 7, " 3.5" V-Anchor Wire Diameter 0.671" Safe Working Load (lbs) 4:1 Safe Working Load (lbs) 4: ø V-Anchor Capacities Using 5-Ton Hook Recess Color: Green ø V-Anchor Capacities Using 7-Ton Hook Recess Color: Yellow MB Item MB Description Wire Diameter MBV5671 MBV6671 MBV7671 MBV8671 MBV9671 MBV10671 MB V-Anchor MB V-Anchor MB V-Anchor MB V-Anchor MB V-Anchor MB V-Anchor Slab Thickness 5" 6" 7" 8" 9" 10" Anchor Height (A) Anchor Spread (B) PSI 4000 PSI 500 PSI 4000 PSI Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear 3,0 4,500 5,910 7,180 9,310 11,650* 4,790 7,610 10,600* 14,50* 14,50* 14,50* 4,070 5,700 6,970 9,080 10,40* 11,650* 5,870 9,50 11,650* 14,50* 14,50* 14,50*,690 3,840 5,000 6,160 8,40 11,650 4,500 6,150 7,800 9,450,00 14,50* 3,400 4,860 6,30 7,790 10,40 11,650 5,700 7,800 9,900,000 13,840 14,50* * The SWL of the MB V-Anchors in these conditions exceed the SWL of the hook. 80

81 V-Anchor Lifting System Technical Information V-ANCHOR INSTALLATION The V-Anchor can be set in various ways to satisfy job requirements, such as the functional shape of the precast element to be handled. An edge distance of two times the anchor depth must be maintained. Adjust anchor capacity if using concrete strength different than that referenced in the Load Data. SETTING WITH A 3/8" ø & 1/" ø WINGNUT STYLE BOLT Installation with the 3/8 or 1/" bolt requires a properly placed hole to be drilled in the form. Assemble the anchor/recess member. Insert the bolt through the previously drilled hole. Line up the bolt and the recess member and screw the bolt into the recess member. Use the wing nut handle of the bolt to facilitate fastening of the units. Draw the recess member/anchor assembly tight to the form with the free-running wing nut on the bolt. Hook-Lift SETTING WITH V-ANCHOR HOLDING PLATE & MAGNETIC HOLDING PLATE Installation without drilling holes in the form, can be accomplished using the holding plate. Attach the holding plate to the form. It can be nailed, screwed, magnetically held or welded. Assemble the anchor/recess member. Center the recess member over the protruding pins of the holding plate and push the recess member onto the pins until the recess member is firmly against the form. WET-SETTING THE V-ANCHOR ASSEMBLY Wet-setting the V-Anchor/recess member assembly is easy to accomplish but care must be taken to ensure that the concrete is well consolidated around the legs of the anchor. Assemble the anchor/recess member. Use duct tape to seal the top cavities of the recess member. For added security, a Holding Plate can be added before the duct tape. Work the assembly down into the concrete until the top of the recess member is flush with the surface of the concrete. If necessary, a small piece of lumber can be attached to the recess member that will allow the assembly to float on the surface of the concrete. 81

82 V-Anchor Lifting System Technical Information MB V-ANCHOR PLACEMENT OPTIONS: MB V-Anchor system versatility allows for many placement options. Using the mounting accessories listed here, the V-Anchor can be placed on the form face down, on the inside or outside form using through bolts or Holding Plates, or wet-set after the concrete has been placed. Once the position and load direction is determined, the capacity in shear or tension, or combination, will assist in proper MB V-Anchor and Recess Member selection. Magnetic Holding Plate (79188) MB Number MB-VRM5T444 MB-VRM7T444 MB-VRM5T671 MB-VRM7T671 MB Description MB V-ANC RM 5T.444 MB V-ANC RM 7T.444 MB V-ANC RM 5T.671 MB V-ANC RM 7T.671 V-Anchor Wire Dia Hook Size Length Depth Width Color 5-Ton 7-Ton 5-Ton 7-Ton 7.75" 10.50" 8.19" 10.50" 3.7" 3.5" 3.30" 3.5" 3.00" 3.03" 3.00" 3.03" Orange Black Green Yellow 3/8" Coil Rod (790) Holding Plate (79111) 1/" Coil Rod (79131) V-Anchor Recess has 3/8" ø and 1/" ø coil nuts for easy installation and 8

83 Hook-Lift Lifting System Anchors HOOK-LIFT ANCHOR The Hook-Lift Anchor is unique in concept and design. It can be used very effectively in a wide variety of utility precast concrete applications. Wall segments, manholes, risers, flat slabs, bases, lids, boxes, vaults and concrete pipe can all be easily handled with the Hook-Lift Anchor. No additional reinforcement is required and lifting can be accomplished without special hardware. Hook-Lift Anchors are ordered by slab size. Refer to the table for slab sizes, anchor dimensions and safe working loads. The Hook-Lift Anchor is available in plain or mechanical galvanize finish. A C Hook-Lift PHYSICAL DATA Item Number 79U40 79U50 79U55 79U60 79U80 79URM 79URC-1 Description 4" Anchor 5" Anchor 5-1/" Anchor 6" Anchor 8" Anchor Disposable Recess Member Reusable Recess Member Dimensions A B C 3-1/8" 6" 5/8" 4-1/8" 6" 5/8" 4-5/8" 6" 5/8" 5-1/8" 6-5/8" 5/8" 7-1/8" 8-1/" 5/8" 8-1/" 8-1/" 3-1/" 3-1/" 3-3/8" 3-3/8" Weight (lbs) To Order, Specify: quantity, name and finish. LOAD CHART: EDGE INSTALL Item Concrete Thickness Tension Shear Number Load in inches (lbs) (lbs) 79U ,000 3,569 79U ,000,478 B Direction of Anchor Safety Factor is approximately 4:1 in 4000 PSI concrete Item Number Load LOAD CHART: FACE INSTALL Concrete Thickness in inches Tension (lbs) Shear (lbs) 45º (lbs) 79U40 4" 1,800,300,05 79U50 5" 3,750 6,000 4,400 79U55 5-1/" 5,000 7,800 5,00 79U60 6" 5,700 9,50 6,100 79U80 8" 9,840,000 10,000 Safety Factor is approximately 4:1 in 4000 PSI concrete B A C HOOK-LIFT EDGE ANCHOR The Hook-Lift Edge Anchor is similar to the face lift anchor, but is a little different in profile to better handle the stresses involved in edge lifts. The Hook-Lift Edge Anchor is available in two sizes and in plain or mechanical galvanize finish. Item Number 79UEL 79UELS Description Edge-Lift Anchor Edge-Lift Anchor Short PHYSICAL DATA & LOAD CHART Dimensions Weight Concrete Thickness A B C (lbs) (in) 15" 3-1/4" " 8" 3-1/4".1 5" 5/8" 5/8" Safety Factor is approximately 4:1 in 4000 PSI concrete 1) Minimum edge distance is equal to times anchor depth for tension values. Edge Tension (lbs) 5,750 3,50 Edge Shear (lbs) N/A N/A Edge 45º Load (lbs) N/A N/A A B C To Order, Specify: quantity, name and finish. 83

84 MB Cable Lift Loop + Plus System Yellow Embedment Depth Gauge MB CABLE LIFT LOOP + PLUS MB Cable Lift Loop + Plus System was developed and tested as a high load system. Each lift loop in the Plus system was tested and approved to the listed loads. These tests were conducted domestically to insure that the capacities meet the required 4:1 in,500 psi concrete. This strong and economical lifting solution may be used in many applications, including, but not limited to utility products, beams and columns. The wide selection of Plus System Loops available insures the most economical lifting cable for the load requirements. The higher the capacity of the Plus System Loops means heavy units can be lifted without changing to a larger cable. For example, the capacity of the Plus System White Lift Loop is rated at,000# SWL, while the lesser systems are rated at 1,300#. All of the Plus System capacities listed are for tension or shear loads, and are available in hot dipped galvanized. H 1/3H Colored Tags These capacities are based on the cable lift loop having an embedment depth of /3 of the overall length. This means that 1/3 of the lift loop is exposed and available for attachment to a lifting hook or shackle. To insure that the cable is embedded to the correct depth, the top of each Plus System Loop is coated in yellow to the 1/3 height mark. Place the loop into the concrete until only the yellow coated portion is exposed. This is visual assurance that at least /3 s of the cable is embedded. In addition, the yellow top and the special Plus System cable identification tag are indicators that the MB Cable Lift Loop + System was used. /3H Wire ø The MB Cable Lift Loop + Plus System is the only high capacity, fully tested system available. Add the embedment depth guide feature, and it becomes the safest system to use. W MB Number CLPSK CLPS.3K CLPS3K CLPS3KL CLPS4.5K CLPS5.K CLPS8.6K CLPS10.4K Description MB Plus System Cable Lift Loop 1/4"x 8-1/4" White Cable Lift Loop 9/3"x 8-7/8" Red Cable Lift Loop 5/16"x 9-1/4" Purple Cable Lift Loop 5/16"x 4" Light Purple Cable Lift Loop 3/8"x 11" Light Green Cable Lift Loop 5/64"x -3/8" Charcoal Cable Lift Loop 9/16"x 14-3/16" Dark Green Cable Lift Loop 5/8"x 15-3/8" Blue MB CABLE LIFT LOOP + PLUS SYSTEM Color Tag White Red Purple Light Purple Light Green Charcoal Dark Green Blue SWL,000,300 3,000 3,000* 4,500 5,00 8,600 10,400 Wire ø Height Width Weight 1/4" 9/3" 5/16" 5/16" 3/8" 5/64" 9/16" 5/8" 8-1/4" 8-7/8" 9-1/4" 4" 11" -3/8" 14-3/16" 15-3/8" 3.94" 4.31" 4.75" 4.75" 5.13" 5.50" 6.31" 7.69" Minimum concrete compressive strength,500 PSI Listed capacities have a 4:1 Safety Factor, shear or tension. * 4" minimum wall thickness, straight tension. 84

85 Coil Lifting Inserts Meadow Burke manufactures many coil inserts and accessories that are implemented and effectively used in the lifting and handling of precast concrete elements. Unusual and/or complicated lifting problems are often accomplished with a coil insert solution. Coil Lifting 85

86 Coil Lifting Insert Technical Information PROPER BOLT LENGTH It is extremely important to make sure that attachment/lifting bolts are the proper length and do not bottom out against the concrete, preventing proper tightening of the lifting hardware. BOLT TORQUE The user of this product should take precautions against overtorque. Torqueing a bolt leads to pretensioning the insert. The user should check torque specifications do not exceed the SWL of the insert. Snug-tight fit is generally all that is required when using the coil products. Tension due to the bolt torque may be estimated using the following equation: F = T/(k t *d b ) where T = torque, d b = bolt diameter, k t = 0. PROPER COIL PENETRATION The most common type of insert failure is caused by the lack of sufficient bolt penetration through the coil of the insert. Under applied load, inadequate bolt penetration of the insert coil will cause the upper part of the coil to unwind and pull out of the insert. This is commonly referred to as the corkscrew effect. See additional coil bolt information on page 90. Clearance Minimum Coil Penetration Setback Typically 1/" IMPORTANT: In precast concrete plant operations, coil bolts should be periodically inspected and replaced if signs of wear or bending are present. Worn or bent bolts should be immediately discarded. Never use a worn or bent bolt for any purpose and never attempt to straighten a bent bolt. 86

87 Coil Lifting Inserts L CX- COIL LOOP INSERT STRAIGHT The CX- Coil Loop Insert is one of the most widely used inserts in the precast industry, and used primarily to lift small precast sections. It is available in the sizes and strengths shown in the table and is also available in special or custom variations to meet a particular need. The Coil Loop Insert Straight is available in plain, hot dip galvanize finish, or stainless steel finish. The insert is not recommended as an edge lift insert by Meadow Burke. B C D CX- COIL LOOP INSERT - STRAIGHT DATA Bolt Diameter B Edge Distance (Tension) 3 Edge Distance (Shear) 4 1/ 1/ 3/4 3/ /4 Insert Length L Safe Work Load (Tension) lbs Safe Work Load (Shear) lbs * /16 1 3/8 1 11/16 1 7/8 1/8 1/8 1/ Coil Length C 1 3/16 1 3/16 1 5/8 1 5/8 1/8 1/3 1/16 Wire Diameter D Coil Lifting Table is based on minimum concrete strength of 3,000 psi and a 4:1 safety factor. 1) Inserts must have a 1/" setback from the surface of the concrete and sufficient coil penetration by the lifting bolt. ) See minimum bolt penetration information on page 96. 3) Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of insert. 4) Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge. 5) Minimum anchor spacing shall be X the edge distance for tension and 3X the edge distance for shear. 6) Anchors with the astericks exceed the shear capacity of the coil rod. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, bolt diameter, length (L dimension) and finish. D B CX-4 COIL LOOP INSERT FLARED The CX-4 Coil Loop Insert Flared is similar to the straight unit above, but has a flared loop for increased tensile capacity. This being a two-strut insert, it is not recommended for use an edge lift insert. The Coil Loop Insert Flared is available plain, hot dip galvanize finish, or stainless steel finish. W L C Warning: This insert is not efficient as an edge lifting insert and is not recommended as such by Meadow Burke. This insert will usually fail when low strength concrete spalls on top of the insert and will generally result in loss of the panel. CX-4 COIL LOOP INSERT - FLARED DATA Bolt Diameter Insert Length L Safe Work Load (Tension) lbs Safe Work Load (Shear) lbs W B Coil Length C 1 3/4 1 3/4 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 5/16 5/16 9/16 Wire Diameter D Edge Distance (Tension) Edge Distance (Shear) /4 3/ /4 1 1/4 1 1/ 3 1/ 5 1/ 5 1/ 5 3/4 5 1/ 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 1 5/8 1 5/8 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 3/4 Table is based on minimum concrete strength of 3,000 psi and a 4:1 safety factor. 1) Inserts must have a 1/" setback from the surface of the concrete and sufficient coil penetration by the lifting bolt. ) See minimum bolt penetration information on page 96. 3) Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of insert. 4) Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge. 5) Minimum anchor spacing shall be X the edge distance for tension and 3X the edge distance for shear. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, bolt diameter, length (L dimension) and finish. 87

88 TOP VIEW DOUBLE FLARED PARALLEL FLARED Coil Lifting Inserts C B CX-6 COIL LOOP INSERT DOUBLE FLARED The CX-6 Coil Loop Insert Double Flared is a four-strut insert available in two styles: the standard flared struts version and the parallel struts version for more confined applications where space is lacking. The four-strut insert offers increased shear and tension capacities and is used effectively in many precast concrete lifting and handling applications. Standard length of the Coil Loop Insert Double Flared is in the bolt diameters shown in the table. It is available in plain, hot dip galvanize, or stainless steel finish. L D Bolt Diameter /4 1 1/ /4 1 1/4 1 1/ 1 1/ Insert Length L Safe Work Load (Tension) lbs , , , , ,500 Safe Work Load (Shear) lbs ,500* , ,500* , ,500 CX-6 COIL LOOP INSERT - DOUBLE FLARED DATA B 1/1 1/4" 5/16 1/ 1/16 1/4 5/16 1/ 9/16 3/4 Coil Length C PARALLEL 1/8 1/8 1/16 1/16 DOUBLE 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 Wire Diameter D Table is based on minimum concrete strength of 3,000 psi and a 4:1 safety factor. 1) Inserts must have a 1/" setback from the surface of the concrete and sufficient coil penetration by the lifting bolt. ) See minimum bolt penetration information on page 96. 3) Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of insert. 4) Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge. 5) Minimum anchor spacing shall be X the edge distance for tension and 3X the edge distance for shear. 6) Anchors with the astericks exceed the shear capacity of the coil rod. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, type, bolt diameter and finish. W E E W 5 1/ 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 1/ 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 E 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/ 1 1/ 5 1/ 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 Edge Distance (Tension) 3 L Edge Distance (Shear) W CX-8 CRISS-CROSS INSERT FLARED The CX-8 Criss-Cross Insert Flared is a compact designed four strut insert offering great versatility and strength. It is very effective in low strength concrete applications. The Criss-Cross Insert Flared is available in plain, hot dip galvanize, or stainless steel finish. B C D Bolt Diameter /4 1 1/4 1 1/ 1 1/ Insert Length L 3/8 1/ 3/8 1/ 3/8 1/ Safe Work Load (Tension) lbs , , ,500 CX-8 CRISS-CROSS INSERT - FLARED DATA Safe Work Load (Shear) lbs ,500* , ,500 Table is based on minimum concrete strength of 3,000 psi and a 4:1 safety factor. 1) Inserts must have a 1/" setback from the surface of the concrete and sufficient coil penetration by the lifting bolt. ) See minimum bolt penetration information on page 96. 3) Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of insert. 4) Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge. 5) Minimum anchor spacing shall be X the edge distance for tension and 3X the edge distance for shear. 6) Anchors with the astericks exceed the shear capacity of the coil rod. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, bolt diameter, length (L dimension) and finish. B 1/16 1/4 5/16 1/ 9/16 3/4 Coil Length C 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 W 5 1/ 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 Wire Diameter D Edge Distance (Tension) Edge Distance (Shear)

89 Coil Lifting Inserts L CX-9 CRISS-CROSS COIL INSERT STRAIGHT The CX-9 Criss-Cross Coil Insert Straight is a high strength four strut insert ideally suited for precast concrete edge lift applications. The four strut design and high safe working loads make this insert a good, safe choice for preventing panel failures. The Criss-Cross Coil Insert Straight is available in plain, hot dip galvanize, or stainless steel finish. See load data below for thin slab edge and face lift. B C D CX-9 COIL LOOP INSERT - STRAIGHT (FACE LIFT INSTALLATION) Bolt Diameter 3/4 3/ /4 1 1/4 Insert Length L Safe Work Load (Tension) lbs ,500 13,500 Safe Work Load (Shear) lbs ,400 B 1 11/ /16 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/ 1/ Coil Length C 1 5/8 1 5/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 Wire Diameter D Edge Distance (Tension) Edge Distance (Shear) SWL based on 3000 psi concrete compressive strength.. SWL includes a 4:1 safety factor. 3. Inserts must have a 1/" setback. 4. See minimum bolt penetration information on page Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of the insert. 6. Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5 x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge, unless noted otherwise. 7. Minimum anchor spacing shall be x the edge distance for tension and 3 x the edge distance for shear. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, bolt diameter, length (L dimension) and finish. Coil Lifting CX-9 COIL LOOP INSERT - STRAIGHT (EDGE LIFT INSTALLATION) Bolt Diameter 3/4 3/ /4 1 1/4 Insert Length L Safe Work Load (Tension) lbs Safe Work Load (Shear) lbs B 1 11/ /16 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/ 1/ Coil Length C 1 5/8 1 5/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 Wire Diameter D Wall Thickness / 5 1/ 5 1/ 5 1/ 6 6 Corner Distance D B C H CX-4 THIN SLAB COIL INSERT The CX-4 Thin Slab Coil Insert is a four strut insert fabricated with a wire coil and four deformed (ribbed) wire legs. This insert is applicable for face lift handling of precast panels, slabs and other similar types of precast elements. The Thin Slab Coil Insert is available in plain, hot dip galvanize, or stainless steel finish. W Bolt Diameter 3/ /4 1 1/ Length Safe Work Load (Tension) lbs Safe Work Load (Shear) lbs CX-4 THIN SLAB COIL INSERT 1. SWL based on 3000 psi concrete compressive strength.. SWL includes a 4:1 safety factor. 3. Inserts must have a 1/" setback. 4. See minimum bolt penetration information on page Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of the insert. 6. Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5 x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge. 7. Minimum anchor spacing shall be x the edge distance for tension and 3 x the edge distance for shear. B 1 5/8 1 7/8 1/4 1/ Coil Length C 1 3/4 1/8 1/8 1/8 W 7 1/8 9 1/ 9 3/4 10 Wire Diameter D Edge Distance (Tension) 4 9 Edge Distance (Shear) To Order, Specify: quantity, name, bolt diameter and finish. 89

90 B Coil Lifting Inserts C CX-8 COIL WINGNUT INSERT The CX-8 Coil Wingnut Insert is designed for use in small envelope and small load applications. Small sections, architectural panels or thin slabs are applications best suited for this insert. The Coil Wingnut Insert is available in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. D H W CX-8 COIL WINGNUT INSERT Bolt Diameter Length H Safe Work Load (Tension) 1, Safe Work Load (Shear) 1, B Coil Length C W Wire Diameter D Edge Distance (Tension) 5 Edge Distance (Shear) 6 1/ 3/4 3/ /4 1/4 3 1/ 1/ 4 1/ lbs lbs /4 1 1/ 1 5/8 1 3/16 1 5/8 1 5/8 4 1/ SWL based on 3000 psi concrete compressive strength.. SWL includes a 4:1 safety factor. 3. Inserts must have a 1/" setback. 4. See minimum bolt penetration information on page Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of the insert. 6. Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5 x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge. 7. Minimum anchor spacing shall be x the edge distance for tension and 3 x the edge distance for shear. B C H CX-41 COIL LIFTING INSERT SINGLE The CX-41 Coil Lifting Insert Single is applicable for face lifting and handling flat panels, slabs, utility boxes, etc. It is fabricated with deformed wire legs for increased pullout strength and is available with or without locator plug and with or without plastic tipped feet. The Coil Lifting Insert Single is available in the bolt diameters and slab thickness shown in the chart and in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. W H = Slab Thickness 3/8" W = Approximately 10" CX-41 COIL LIFTING INSERT - SINGLE Bolt Diameter 3/ /4 1 1/ Tension lbs Slab or Panel Thickness and Safe Work Load (Tension) / Shear lbs Tension lbs Shear lbs Tension lbs Shear lbs Tension lbs Shear lbs Tension lbs Shear lbs Tension lbs Shear lbs Edge Distance (Tension) Edge Distance (Shear) SWL based on 3000 psi concrete compressive strength.. SWL includes a 4:1 safety factor. 3. Inserts must have a 1/" setback. 4. See minimum bolt penetration information on page Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of the insert. 6. Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5 x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge. 7. Minimum anchor spacing shall be x the edge distance for tension and 3 x the edge distance for shear. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, bolt diameter, slab thickness and finish. 90

91 Coil Lifting Inserts L CX-4 COIL LIFTING INSERT DOUBLE The CX-4 Coil Lifting Insert Double is two single coil lifting inserts joined by a wire spacer. The insert is available in three bolt diameters, as shown in the table. Note that the 1 diameter unit has a center to center dimension of and the 1-1/4 and 1-1/ units employ a 15 center-to-center dimension. The Coil Lifting Insert Double is often used as a face lifting insert for heavy panels or slabs and is also an effective strongback insert. It is available in plain, hot dip galvanize or stainless steel finish. WIRE SPACER CX-4 COIL LIFTING INSERT - SINGLE Bolt Diameter 1 1 1/4 1 1/ Tension lbs / Shear lbs Tension lbs Shear lbs Slab or Panel Thickness and Safe Work Load (Tension) Tension lbs Shear lbs Tension lbs Shear lbs Tension lbs Shear lbs Tension lbs Shear lbs Edge Distance (Tension) Edge Distance (Shear) Coil Lifting 1. SWL based on 3000 psi concrete compressive strength.. SWL includes a 4:1 safety factor. 3. Inserts must have a 1/" setback. 4. See minimum bolt penetration information on page Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of the insert. 6. Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5 x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge. 7. Minimum anchor spacing shall be x the edge distance for tension and 3 x the edge distance for shear. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, bolt diameter, slab thickness and finish. CX-43 EDGE LIFT INSERT SINGLE The CX-43 Edge Lift Insert Single is a light-duty edge lift insert similar to the CX-4 Coil Loop Insert Flared, but has a shaped strut added to the top of the insert s coil. This added wire strut helps to distribute shear loads into the concrete during the lifting process. The insert should always be set with the shear strut in the direction of the pull. Note that for the insert to develop the posted working loads, the insert must be setback 1/" from the concrete surface. Plywood cutouts or stacked cut washers can be utilized as setback spacers. The Edge Lift Insert Single is available in 3/4" and 1 bolt diameters in lengths shown in the table and in plain, hot dip galvanize or stainless steel finish. L WARNING: If concrete over insert fails, wire struts may break resulting in loss of panel. Insert Type single single single single Bolt Diameter 3/4 3/4 1 1 mm Insert Length L 9 9 mm Type Loading Tension Shear Tension Shear CX-43 EDGE LIFT INSERT - SINGLE DATA (Edge Thickness) Safe Work Load 4 inch 5 inch 5 1/ inch 6 inch 7 1/4 inch 8 inch lbs. kn lbs. kn lbs. kn lbs. kn lbs. kn lbs kn Table is based on minimum concrete strength of 3,000 psi and a 4:1 safety factor. 1) Inserts must have a 1/" setback from the surface of the concrete and sufficient coil penetration by the lifting bolt. ) See minimum bolt penetration information on page 96. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, bolt diameter and finish. 91

92 Coil Lifting Inserts CX-44 EDGE LIFT INSERT DOUBLE The CX-44 Edge Lift Insert Double is like the single unit, but has a second insert attached with a shaped wire strut. The insert should always be set with the shear strut in the direction of the pull. Note that for the insert to develop the posted working loads, the insert must be setback 1/" from the concrete surface. Plywood cutouts or stacked cut washers can be utilized as setback spacers. The Edge Lift Insert Double is available in 3/4" and 1 bolt diameters and lengths shown in the table and is available in plain, hot dip galvanize, or stainless steel finish. L WARNING: If concrete over insert fails, wire struts may break resulting in loss of panel. " Insert Type double double double double Bolt Diameter 3/4 3/4 1 1 mm Insert Length L 9 9 mm Type Loading Tension Shear Tension Shear CX-44 EDGE LIFT INSERT - DOUBLE DATA (Edge Thickness) Safe Work Load 4 inch 5 inch 5 1/ inch 6 inch 7 1/4 inch 8 inch lbs. kn lbs. kn lbs. kn lbs. kn lbs. kn lbs kn Table is based on minimum concrete strength of 3,000 psi and a 4:1 safety factor. 1) Inserts must have a 1/" setback from the surface of the concrete and sufficient coil penetration by the lifting bolt. ) See minimum bolt penetration information on page 96. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, bolt diameter and finish. CX-45 EDGE PICKUP INSERT SINGLE The CX-45 Edge Pickup Insert Single combines a strong coil tie and two horizontal struts to form a higher capacity edge lift insert. Note that for the insert to develop the posted working loads, the insert must be setback 1/" from the concrete surface. Plywood cutouts or stacked cut washers can be utilized as setback spacers. The Edge Pickup Insert Single is available in 1" and 1-1/4 bolt diameters and lengths shown in the table and is available in plain, hot dip galvanize, or stainless steel finish. L 6" ".440 6" /4 Bolt Size mm Insert Length L CX-45 EDGE PICKUP INSERT - SINGLE DATA mm 8 54 Minimum Edge Thickness 5 1/ 7 1/4 mm lbs Tension kn Safe Work Load lbs Shear kn Table is based on minimum concrete strength of 3,000 psi and a 4:1 safety factor. 1) Inserts must have a 1/" setback from the surface of the concrete and sufficient coil penetration by the lifting bolt. ) See minimum bolt penetration information on page 96. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, bolt diameter and finish. 9

93 Coil Lifting Inserts CX-46 EDGE PICKUP INSERT DOUBLE The CX-46 Edge Pickup Insert Double is two single edge pick inserts spaced apart by two horizontal wire struts resulting in higher lifting capacity. Note that for the insert to develop the posted working loads, the insert must be setback 1/" from the concrete surface. Plywood cutouts or stacked cut washers can be utilized as setback spacers. The Edge Pickup Insert Double is available in 1" and 1-1/4 bolt diameters and lengths shown in the table and is available in plain, hot dip galvanize, or stainless steel finish ".440 " 4" 6" L CX-46 EDGE PICKUP INSERT - DOUBLE DATA 1 1 1/4 Bolt Size mm Insert Length L mm 8 54 Minimum Edge Thickness 5 1/ 7 1/4 mm lbs Tension kn Safe Work Load lbs Shear kn Coil Lifting Table is based on minimum concrete strength of 3,000 psi and a 4:1 safety factor. 1) Inserts must have a 1/" setback from the surface of the concrete and sufficient coil penetration by the lifting bolt. ) See minimum bolt penetration information on page 90. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, bolt diameter and finish. CX-51 OPEN COIL INSERT The CX-51 Open Coil Insert is designed to enlarge and increase the shear cone surface area, which in effect increases the load capacity of the insert without increasing the insert s corresponding length. This is a very versatile insert used for many functions, lifting precast boxes, manholes or other utility shapes. C B W The CX-51 Open Coil Insert is available with an attached mounting washer welded to the front end of the insert. Mounting washers have nail holes for nailing the insert to a wood form or bolting to a steel form. Standard sizes shown below. Custom sizes available upon request and is available in plain, hot dip galvanize, or stainless steel finish. L CX-51 OPEN COIL INSERT DATA Bolt Diameter Length (L) SWL (Tension) lbs. SWL (Shear) lbs. Number of Struts B Coil Length (C) W Wire Diameter (D) Edge Distance (Tension) Edge Distance (Shear) 3/4 4-1/ 4,50 4,50 1 3/4 1 5/8-1/ / 6,50 6,50 1/4 1/8-1/ / 10,000, /4 1/8-3/ /4 7 1/,000, / 1/ /4 9 1/ 16,000 16, / 1/ / 9 1/ 16,000 16, /4 1/ SWL based on 3000 psi concrete compressive strength.. SWL includes a 4:1 safety factor. 3. Inserts must have a 1/" setback. 4. See minimum bolt penetration information on page Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of the insert. 6. Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5 x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge. 7. Minimum anchor spacing shall be x the edge distance for tension and 3 x the edge distance for shear. To Order, Specify: quantity, type, safe working load, bolt diameter and length. 93

94 Coil Lifting Insert Accessories CN-5 COIL NUT The CN-5 Standard Coil Nut is manufactured from hex stock and is available in 1/" through 1-1/ diameters. Dimensions are displayed in the table. W The Standard Coil Nut safe working loads are based on an approximate 5:1 safety factor for lifting applications. L NOTE: Coil Nut Heavy page 86 1/ 3/ /4 1/1/ Bolt Size mm lbs ,800 16,00 CN-5 STANDARD COIL NUT DATA Safe Work Load (Tension) One CN-5 Two CN-5 or One CN-5 kn lbs. kn , , ,000 0 Table is based on a 5:1 safety factor for lifting applications. 1) Note that in order to achieve the published safe working loads of Coil Bolts, Coil Rods, etc., two () Standard Coil Nuts tightly locked together are required when using the Standard Coil Nut. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and bolt diameter. 1/ 5/ /4 1 1/ Nut Length L mm Width Across Flats W 7/8 1 1/8 1 5/8 3/8 mm CN-5 COIL NUT HEAVY The CN-5 Heavy Coil Nut is manufactured from hex stock like the Standard Coil Nut, but is of sufficient length to develop the safe working load required for heavy form tying systems and precast lifting applications. The Heavy Coil Nut safe working loads are based on an approximate 5:1 safety factor for lifting applications. W L 1/ 3/ /4 1 1/ Bolt Size mm CN-5 HEAVY COIL NUT DATA Safe Work Load (Tension) Two CN-5 or One CN-5 Nut Length L lbs. kn / 15,000 67, / 7, mm Width Across Flats W 7/8 1 1/8 1 5/8 3/8 mm Table is based on a 5:1 safety factor for lifting applications. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and bolt diameter. 94

95 Coil Lifting Insert Accessories CW-4 FLAT WASHER The CW-4 Flat Washers are manufactured from ASTM A36 flat steel plate and are designed to provide the required bearing against the form members. Flat Washers are available in many sizes in both standard and heavy versions. Refer to the table for dimensions. T L W CW-4 FLAT WASHER DATA 1/ 3/ /4 1 1/ 1/ 3/ /4 1 1/ Bolt Size mm Type Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Heavy Heavy Heavy Heavy Heavy 1/4 1/4 1/ 1/ 3/4 1/4 1/ 3/ 3/4 3/4 T L W mm mm mm Coil Lifting To Order, Specify: quantity, name and bolt diameter. CR-4 COIL ROD CR-4 Continuous Coil Rod is manufactured and stocked in -0 lengths. Special lengths are available up to 0-0. Requires minimum two () Standard CN-5 Coil Nuts or one (1) Heavy CN-5 Coil Nut to develop full safe work load. Minimum coil thread penetration is same as shown for coil bolts. See Table on page 88 to assure minimum coil penetration. May be cut with carborundum blades without thread damage. Do not use cutting torch to cut coil rod. CR-4 HI-STRENGTH CONTINUOUS COIL ROD SELECTION TABLE Bolt Diameter Safe Work Load Tension Shear In. mm. lbs. kn. lbs. kn. 1/ / / / Table is based on a 5:1 safety factor for lifting applications. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, bolt diameter and length. 95

96 Coil Lifting Insert Accessories CB- COIL BOLT The CB- Coil Bolts are available in 1/" through 1-1/ diameters for use with Coil Ties, Coil Inserts and other Meadow Burke products furnished with coil threads. Coil Bolts are manufactured with the fast-threading, self-cleaning coil thread and are available in lengths as needed. Coil Bolts may be furnished with an integral forged head or with a hex nut welded to a length of continuous coil rod. Standard thread length of the integral forged head Coil Bolt is 4 on the 1/" diameter and 4-1/ on all other sizes. Use of waterproof, stain resistant grease applied to the bolt shaft will aid in the bolt removal process. Note that Coil Bolts are subject to wear and misuse and should be continually inspected for wear, cracks, bends, overstressing, etc. If there is any indication of these types of problems, the bolt should be discarded. WARNING: Minimum coil penetration is extremely important and must be adhered to when threading Coil Bolts into other coil-threaded products. Safe working loads are dependent on maintaining the appropriate minimum coil penetration; failure to do so can lead to a premature failure of the coil and compromise worker safety. Refer to the table for safe working loads and minimum coil penetration lengths. Minimum Coil Penetration Setback Typically 1/" 1/ (13 mm) Diameter Safe Work Load lbs Minimum Coil Penetration kn 16 mm 51 Table is based on a 5:1 safety factor for lifting applications. 3/4 (13 mm) Diameter Safe Work Load 1 (5 mm) Diameter Safe Work Load 1 1/4 (31.5 mm) Diameter Safe Work Load 1 1/ (38 mm) Diameter Safe Work Load Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear kn lbs. kn lbs. kn lbs. kn lbs. kn lbs. kn lbs. kn lbs Minimum Coil Minimum Coil Minimum Coil Minimum Coil Penetration Penetration Penetration Penetration lbs /4 mm 57 1/ CB- COIL BOLT DATA 6 Threads / 4.5 Threads / 3.5 Threads / 3.5 Threads / 3.5 Threads / mm 65 3 mm 75 3 mm 75 kn 80 To Order, Specify: quantity, name and bolt diameter. D CP- Coil Setting Plug Plastic The CP- Coil Setting Plug Plastic is available in 1/", 3/4" and 1 diameters. They are effectively used to set inserts in the form by nailing the plug to the form face and then threading the coil insert onto the plug. The reusable plugs are easily removed from the concrete after the form has been stripped. The Coil Setting Plug can also be used as a temporary cap when another pour will be made at a later time. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and bolt diameter. CP- Coil Setting Plug - Plastic Bolt Diameter 1/ 3/4 1 D H L 15/16 1/4 1/ 3/4 3/4 9/ / L H 96

97 Coil Lifting Insert Accessories D LP-11 LIFT PLATE SWIVEL The LP-11 Lift Plate Swivel is a high strength unit designed for use with 3/4 or 1 bolt diameter single face or edge lift inserts. It s made of forged steel and has a rated safe working load of 11,000 lbs with an approximate safety factor of 5:1. Caution: The swivel lift plate must have full bearing on smooth, flat concrete and be securely tightened. See the Lifting Plate section of Lifting hardware Considerations on page 7. T Note: SWL of Lift Plate requires installation of a standard flat washer underneath bolt head. 1 1/" L W WARNINGS: Do not use any attachment bolt to fasten a swivel lift plate that shows excess wear, is bent or has any other factor that compromises its safe working load. Verify that the coil bolt is of proper length and properly penetrates the coil. See page 88. Monitor the direction of pull on the lift plate s bail. Do not permit a sideways pull. Any of the warnings, if not heeded, can result in serious injury. Coil Lifting LP-11 LIFT PLATE - SWIVEL DATA Bolt Size L W D T Minimum Bolt Length* 3/4 1 mm mm 5 5 1/ 1/ mm /4 4 3/4 mm /16 9/16 mm mm Table is based on a 5:1 safety factor for lifting applications. * Based on a 6 1/" turn coil and insert setback 1/" from the surface of the concrete. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and bolt diameter. LP-0 LIFT PLATE DOUBLE SWIVEL The LP-0 Lift Plate Double Swivel is designed to allow the bail to swivel 360 in the horizontal plane and 180 in the vertical plane. This feature allows the unit to rotate to the direction of the pull. It is available for use with 1", 1-1/4" and 1-1/" bolt diameters. Refer to the table for dimensions and safe working loads. Caution: The Lift Plate - Double Swivel must have full bearing on smooth, flat concrete and be securely tightened. See the Lifting Plate section of Lifting hardware Considerations on page 7. H Note: SWL of Lift Plate requires installation of a standard flat washer underneath bolt head. W WARNINGS: Do not use any attachment bolt to fasten a swivel lift plate that shows excess wear, is bent or has any other factor that compromises its safe working load. Verify that the coil bolt is of proper length and properly penetrates the coil. See page 88. Any of the warnings above, if not heeded, can result in serious injury. LP-0 LIFT PLATE - DOUBLE SWIVEL DATA Bolt Diameter Safe Work Load H W Minimum Bolt Length* 1 1 1/4 1 1/ mm lbs ,000 16,000 kn /16 3/4 3/4 mm mm mm Table is based on a 5:1 safety factor for lifting applications. * Based on a 6 1/" turn coil and insert setback 1/" from the surface of the concrete. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and bolt diameter. 97

98 Coil Lifting Insert Accessories LP- LIFT PLATE - EDGE The LP- Lift Plate Edge is designed for edge lifting applications using 3/4" or 1 bolt diameter double edge lift inserts that have a center-to-center bolt pattern. Note: This lift plate is not intended for face lift applications. H Note: SWL of Lift Plate requires installation of washer below bolt head. WARNING: Do not permit sideward loading on this lift plate. Sideward loading can cause a premature failure resulting in serious injury. T W S L LP- LIFT PLATE - EDGE DATA Bolt Diameter Safe Work Load T W L H S 3/4 1 mm 19 5 lbs kn mm mm " 18" mm / 5 1/ mm " " mm Table is based on a 5:1 safety factor for lifting applications. To Order, Specify: quantity and name. (LP-44 LIFT PLATE ANGLE The LP-44 Lift Plate Angle is designed for use with face lifting applications using the CX-4 Double Coil Lifting Insert It can also be used on edge lift applications if the panel thickness is 6 inches or greater. Note: SWL of Lift Plate requires installation of washer below bolt head. WARNING: Do not permit sideward loading on this lift plate. Sideward loading can cause a premature failure resulting in serious injury. 4" W S L LP-44 LIFT PLATE - ANGLE DATA Bolt Diameter Safe Work Load M Bolt Length S T L W 1 1 1/4 1 1/ mm lbs.,000 18,000 18,000 kn mm mm /4 3/4 3/4 mm mm " 6" 6" Table is based on a 5:1 safety factor for lifting applications. mm To Order, Specify: quantity and name. CX-47 COIL LOCATOR PLUG The CX-47 Coil Locator Plug is a two-piece unit used with face lift inserts to mark their position after screeding is completed. The lower portion of the plug provides proper bolt clearance under insert s coil to prevent bottoming of the attaching bolt. CX-47 COIL LOCATOR PLUG DATA Insert Size/Bolt Diameter Length of Void Below Bottom of Coil 3/ /4 mm / 1 5/8 1 3/4 mm To Order, Specify: quantity, name and bolt diameter. L 98

99 Coil Lifting Insert Accessories D CN-49 EYE BOLT The CN-49 Eye Bolt is a cast ductile iron unit furnished with a specified length of high strength coil rod welded in place. The unit is available in the bolt diameters shown in the table and with any length of coil rod. Caution: Extra care must be taken to ensure that the Eye Bolt is tightened securely against the concrete surface. Failure to do so may allow the coil rod to bend and precipitate a premature failure. WARNING: Eye Bolts are intended for straight tension loading only. Angular loading severely reduces the safe workloads and must be avoided or properly considered. See reduction factors below. A E B L C CN-49 EYE BOLT DATA Bolt Diameter Safe Work Load (Tension) A B C D E 1/ 3/ /4 mm lbs ,800 kn /4 3 1/ 5 6 1/4 mm /8 1 3/4 3/4 3 1/ mm /4 1 1/ mm /4 3/ /4 mm mm Coil Lifting Table is based on a 5:1 safety factor for lifting applications. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, bolt diameter and bolt length ( L dimension). CN-49 EYE BOLT REDUCTION FACTORS FOR ANGULAR LOADING Reduction factors when an angle pull is required: Locate the safe workload in the table above for the Eye Bolt diameter that is being used. Multiply the safe working load shown in the table by the appropriate reduction factor shown in the schematic. CN-49 Eye Bolts may be ordered without coilrod welded in as a CN-48 Eye Nut X (SWL) 0º 0.0 X (SWL) 90º 0.15 X (SWL) LIFT-IT PLATE The Super-Lift III Lift-it Plate will lift panels with misplaced or displaced inserts. It requires the use of six MB Slam Anchors (for panels less than 9-1/4") or six MB Brace Bolts (for panels 9-1/4" thick or greater). See pages 174 and 176 for additional information. Item Number Lift-It Plate Ultimate Lifting Capacity 1,000 lbs. Unit Weight [lbs.] 3 lbs. 15/16" diameter hole required 99

100 Lift-It Plate INSTALLATION (PANELS LESS THAN 9-1/4") 1. Drill 7/8 diameter hole to 6 deep (minimum) from tip of drill bit. Clean out dust. Use Lift-It Plate as template.. Place six bolt and drop-in assemblies through the Lift-it plate and into the 7/8 holes and tap until flush with the top of the plate. 3. Tap the bottom base of the Lift-it Plate towards the top of panel (about 1/16") to engage the plate to the bolts. 4. Insert a setting pin into the hole in the center of a bolt. Place the specially designed slammer setting tool over the pin and bolt and pound the ram on the setting tool all the way down. 5. Once the ram is driven all the way down use the Slammer setting tool to check that the Slam Anchor is tightened using approximately 1/8 (minimum) to 1/ (maximum) turns. Do not use an impact wrench and no torque wrench is required. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for remaining 5 bolts. INSTALLATION (PANELS GREATER THAN 9-1/4") 1. Drill 0mm diameter hole to 9 deep (minimum) from tip of drill bit. Clean out dust. Use Lift-It Plate as template.. Place MB Brace Bolt into the hole through the hardened washer and the Liftit Plate as shown. 3. Turn bolt into the concrete using a large 3/4" impact wrench with a 30mm socket 4. If it is necessary to remove the bolt and reinstall it, hand thread the bolt to start it in the original threads

101 RAPID-LOK Connection Plate System* The Meadow Burke Rapid-Lok Connection Plate System eliminates many field welding operations with its unique design. Each System connection has three basic parts: an embed plate, a void former and the bearing angle. Many sizes are available, and special sizes and/or configurations are available on special order. All connections are in conformance to recommendations set forth in the Precast Concrete Institute (PCI) Design Handbook, 6th Edition. Rapid-Lok 101

102 RAPID-LOK Connection Plate System Primary Types of Assemblies: The Bearing Angle Assembly: Rapid-Lok assembly, consisting of an Embed Plate and a Bearing Angle. The Bearing Corbel Assembly: This Rapid-Lok Assembly is used to improve the aesthetics, while being capable of reaching a - hour fire rating if required. The assembly consists of an Embed Plate and a Bearing Corbel. Concrete Corbel Cast-In-Place Locking Stud Option Bearing Angles can be ordered with optional factory installed studs, attached to the outside face of the angle, as shown. To create the concrete corbel look, place the special Rapid-Lok in a mold and pour the desired concrete mix. This creates a concrete corbel that is hard to differentiate from one poured monolithically, with the attachment ease and efficiencies that the Rapid-Lok Connection System provides. The Primary Assembly Components: Embed Plate The Embed Plate consists of a flat (ASTM A36) steel plate with headed studs welded to the back for embedment. Stud pattern and sizes have been engineered to optimize performance. The keyhole shaped slots are used to make a rapid connection of the Bearing Angle or Bearing Corbel to the Embed Plate. The Bearing Point locators have been improved to Diamond Holes that are visible from either side, even after galvanizing. The Safe Working Load (SWL) is applied to the front of all steel components for easy identification after installation. The Void Former Each Void Former is a plastic box which fits into the keyhole and is secured into place with new locking stems, eliminating any concrete leakage, even when Self Consolidating Concrete is used. This new former creates a voided area, free of concrete behind the Embed Plate and permits the attachment of the Bearing Angle or Bearing Corbel without interference. The Bearing Angle and Bearing Corbel The Bearing Angle and Bearing Corbel are engineered with interlocking Super Studs, allowing them to be securely connected to the Embed Plate without bolts or welding. The studs are specially treated and have been cold tested to ensure strength, durability and cold weather performance. In addition, when using the Corbel unit, insulation and a bottom cover plate can be factory installed to increase the fire rating from 1-hour to -hour. All corbel units are delivered with a bottom plate to improve the overall appearance when viewed from below. 10

103 RAPID-LOK Connection Plate System Increases the workability, strength, speed, accuracy of installation and performance. Diamond Bearing Point Holes 0K SWL Diamond Holes Knowing exactly where the Bearing Point is located has never been easier. Find the Diamond Hole, line up the correct elevation to the corners, and the Rapid-Lok is right on! Note that this is a through hole, visible from either side, even after galvanizing. Setting Holes Setting Holes aid in the installation process, are 0.56 in diameter and are consistently located for use with templates during production. Rapid-Lok Setting Hole 0K SWL Stamp The Safe Working Load of the device is located in the corner of each Rapid-Lok. This indicates the unit s SWL; installation conditions and location may reduce the actual SWL. It is to be used only as a convenient indicator of the unit installed after the concrete has been placed. Super Stud Super Stud The Bearing Angle and Bearing Corbel have a specially treated stud to increase their strength and durability during the shipping, handling and the installation processes, even in cold weather

104 RAPID-LOK Connection Plate System The Rapid-Lok Structural Connection System reduces the expensive welding process inherent on nearly all precast projects. Save thousands of dollars when you use Meadow Burke s Rapid-Lok Connection System. e Install the Rapid-Lok Embed Plate as you would any other embedded weld plate. Prior to lifting the precast element, simply slide the Rapid-Lok Bearing Angle into the Rapid-Lok Embed Plate; no welding or bolting is required. F Rapid-Lok may be ordered in alternative configurations and stud sizes. Rapid-Lok Model 6 KIP 4 15 KIP 4 0 KIP 6 0 KIP 8 30 KIP 8 30 KIP Thin Wall 40 KIP 8-1/ 0 KIP 7-7/8 Steel Corbel 30 KIP 7-7/8 Steel Corbel 40 KIP 7-7/8 Steel Corbel 0 KIP 6 Concrete Corbel 0 KIP 8 Concrete Corbel 30 KIP 8 Concrete Corbel 30 KIP 8 Thin Wall Concrete Corbel 40 KIP 8-1/ Concrete Corbel A A A A A A B A A B B B B A B B B B D C B D C D C D C C D C D D C D C E E E D C E E E D E E E E E E 6K-4 15K-4 0K-6 0K-8 30K-8 40K-8.5 0K Corbel 30K Corbel 40K Corbel C 30K-TW Item Number 6RLA 6RLP 15RLA 15RLP 0RLA 0RLP 0RLA8 0RLP8 30RLA 30RLP 30RLA 30RLPTW 40RLA 40RLP 0RLC1* 0RLC** 0RLCP 30RLC1* 30RLC** 30RLCP 40RLC1* 40RLC** 40RLCP 0RLAS 0RLP 0RLA8S 0RLP8 30RLAS 30RLP 30RLAS 30RLPTW 40RLAS 40RLP Rapid-Lok Structural Connection Plate System Data Plain Finish Hot Dipped Galvanized Embed Plate Dim. Bearing Angle & Corbel Dim. Bearing Point Embed Plate Stud Qty & Size MB Product Number * ** * 57300** * 57360** Item Number 6RLAG 6RLPG 15RLAG 15RLPG 0RLAG 0RLPG 0RLA8G 0RLP8G 30RLAG 30RLPG 30RLAG 30RLPTWG 40RLAG 40RLPG 0RLC1G* 0RLCG** 0RLCPG 30RLC1G* 30RLCG** 30RLCPG 40RLC1G* 40RLCG** 40RLCPG 0RLASG 0RLPG 0RLA8SG 0RLP8G 30RLASG 30RLPG 30RLASG 30RLPTWG 40RLASG 40RLPG MB Product Number * ** * 57305** * 57365** Description 6K-4 Bearing Angle 6K-Embed Plate 15K-4 Bearing Angle 15K-Embed Plate 0K-6 Bearing Angle 0K-Embed Plate 0K-8 Bearing Angle 0K-Embed Plate 30K-8 Bearing Angle 30K-Embed Plate 30K-8 Bearing Angle 30K-Thin Wall Embed Plate 40K-8-1/ Bearing Angle 40K-Embed Plate 0K-7-7/8 Bearing Corbel 0K-Corbel Embed Plate 30K-7-7/8 Bearing Corbel 30K-Corbel Embed Plate 40K-7-7/8 Bearing Corbel 40K-Corbel Embed Plate 0K-6 Bearing Angle w/studs 0K-Embed Plate 0K-8 Bearing Angle w/studs 0K-Embed Plate 30K-8 Bearing Angle w/studs 30K-Embed Plate 30K-8" Bearing Angle w/studs 30K-Thin Wall Embed Plate 40K-8-1/ Bearing Angle w/studs 40K-Embed Plate Vertical SWL (KIPS) Horizontal SWL (KIPS) Fire Rating Hours A (inches) *One hour fire rating. **Two hour fire rating requires steel corbel to be factory filled with 6-pcf mineral wool and bottom cover installed. *** Special 3 hour rated model available upon request. 6 KIP 15 KIP 0 KIP 0 KIP 30 KIP 30 KIP 40 KIP 0 KIP 30 KIP 40 KIP 0 KIP 0 KIP 30 KIP 30 KIP 40 KIP 3 KIP 9 KIP 11 KIP 11 KIP 18 KIP 18 KIP 6 KIP 11 KIP 15 KIP 6 KIP 11 KIP 11 KIP 18 KIP 18 KIP 6 KIP 3 Hour 1 Hour 1 Hour 1 Hour Hour Hour 1 Hour 1 Hour Hour** 1 Hour Hour** 1 Hour Hour** Hour 3 Hour Hour Hour Hour 8" 10" 10" 10" 15.5" 15.5" 15.5" 10" 10" 14.75" 10" 10" 15.5" 15.5" 15.5" B (inches) 10.65" 10.65" 10.65" 10.65" " " 13.5".13" 18.13" 18.13" 10.65" 10.65" " " 13.5" C (inches) 4" 4" 6" 8" 8" 8" 8.5" 7.875" 7.875" 7.875" 6" 8" 8" 8" 8.5" D (inches) 6" 7.75" 7.75" 7.75" 14" 14" " 10" 10" 14.75" 7.75" 7.75" 14" 14" " E (inches) 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 11.5" 10" 16" 16" 8" 8" 8" 8" 11.5" F (inches) 1.65" 1.65" 1.65" 1.65" " " 5.75".75".75".75" 1.65" 1.65" " " 5.75" # of Studs/ Embed Plate Stud Size (inches) 3/4" x 3" 3/4" x 3" 3/4" x 5" 3/4" x 6" 3/4" x 8" 3/4" x 5" 3/4" x 7" 3/4"x6-1/" 3/4 x6-1/" 3/4" x 8" 3/4" x 5" 3/4" x 6" 3/4" x 8" 3/4"x 5" 3/4" x 7" RLA=Rapid-Lok Bearing Angle RLP=Rapid-Lok Embed Plate RLC=Rapid-Lok Bearing Corbel - Steel RLCP=Rapid-Lok Embed Plate Steel Corbel RLAS=Rapid-Lok Bearing Angle w/cip Studs - for customer installed concrete 104

105 Rapid-Lok Placement vs. Load Chart Center line of Bearing Point Bearing Point Position A B D A: Edge (left or right) B: Field (no edge) C: Above Opening D: Between Opening and Edge Figure 1 C Embed Plate Note: Proper installation of the Rapid-Lok Bearing Angle and/or Corbel is indicated by the bearing surface being properly positioned at the center/corners of the Diamond Holes. No load is to be applied to the Rapid-Lok assembly until these units are fully and properly engaged. Minimum Edge Distance and Safe Work Loads Rapid-Lok Rapid-Lok Model & & & MB Item Number 6RLA 6RLP 15RLA 15RLP 0RLA 0RLP 0RLA8 0RLP8 0RLC1 & 0RLCP 30RLA 30RLP 30RLA 30RLPTW 30RLC1 & 30RLCP 40RLA 40RLP 40RLC1 & 40RLCP Rapid-Lok Assembly Type 6 KIP - 4" 15 KIP - 4" 0 KIP - 6" 0 KIP - 8" 0 KIP 7-7/8" Corbel 30 Kip - 8" 30 Kip Thin Wall 30 Kip 7-7/8" Corbel 40 KIP 8-1/" 40 KIP 7-7/8" Corbel Vertical Load Eccentricity e.5".5" 4" 4" 6" 5" 5" 6" 5" 6" Position A Vertical Horizontal SWL (KIPS) SWL (KIPS).30K Vertical M 11.00" 7.88K Vertical M 10.00" 6.07K Vertical M 14.00" 6.07K Vertical M 14.00" 6.07K Vertical M 14.00".6K Vertical M 19.00".6K Vertical M 19.00" 30.00k Vertical M 19.00" 7.49K Vertical M 17.00" 40.00K Vertical M 19.00" 1.44K Horizontal M 6.00" 6.10K Horizontal M 7.00" 9.95K Horizontal M 9.00" 9.95K Horizontal M 9.00" 9.95K Horizontal M Horizontal M 13.00" Horizontal M 13.00" 17.81k Horizontal M.00" 18.74K Horizontal M.00" 4.00K Horizontal M 15.00" Position B Vertical Horizontal SWL (KIPS) SWL (KIPS) 6.00K Vertical M 11.00" 15.00K Vertical M 14.00" 0.00K Vertical M 14.00" 0.00K Vertical M 14.00" 0.00K Vertical M 14.00" Vertical M 19.00" Vertical M 19.00" 30.00k Vertical M 19.00" 40.00K Vertical M 17.00" 40.00K Vertical M 19.00" 3.00K Horizontal M 11.00" 8.91K Horizontal M 9.00" 11.39K Horizontal M 14.00" 11.39K Horizontal M 14.00" 11.39K Horizontal M 14.00" 17.81K Horizontal M 19.00" 17.81K Horizontal M 19.00" 17.81K Horizontal M.00" 6.01K Horizontal M.00" 4.00K Horizontal M 15.00" Position C Vertical Horizontal SWL (KIPS) SWL (KIPS) 6.00k Vertical M 11.00" 7.8K Vertical M 10.00" 7.46K Vertical M 10.00" 7.46K Vertical M 10.00" 7.46K Vertical M 10.00" 9.7K Vertical M 13.00" 9.7K Vertical M 13.00" 30.00k Vertical M 19.00" 1.8K Vertical M 10.00" 40.00K Vertical M 19.00" 3.00K Horizontal M 11.00" 8.91K Horizontal M 9.00" 11.39K Horizontal M 14.00" 11.39K Horizontal M 14.00" 11.39K Horizontal M 14.00" 17.81K Horizontal M 19.00" 17.81K Horizontal M 19.00" 17.81K Horizontal M.00" 6.01K Horizontal M.00" 4.00K Horizontal M 15.00" Position D Vertical Horizontal SWL (KIPS) SWL (KIPS) 6.00K Vertical M 11.00" 15.00K Vertical M 14.00" 0.00K Vertical M 14.00" 0.00K Vertical M 14.00" 0.00K Vertical M 14.00" 30.00K Vertical M 19.00" 30.00K Vertical M 19.00" 30.00K Vertical M 19.00" 40.00K Vertical M 17.00" 40.00K Vertical M 19.00" 3.00K Horizontal M 11.00" 8.91K Horizontal M 9.00" 11.39K Horizontal M 14.00" 11.39K Horizontal M 14.00" 11.39K Horizontal M 14.00" 17.81K Horizontal M 19.00" 17.81K Horizontal M 19.00" 17.81K Horizontal M.00" 6.01K Horizontal M.00" 4.00K Horizontal M 15.00" 1) Safe Working Loads are based on actual tests for standard stud patterns and components and results in an approximate 3:1 safety factor. Free test reports available upon request. ) Vertical Safe Work Load is based on the applied vertical load at eccentricity e shown with an incidental horizontal load due to eccentricity included, but no additional applied horizontal load. 3) The above load values are based on full or partial shear cone development in reinforced 5000 psi compressive strength concrete. 4) Full vertical and horizontal SWL limits cannot be used simultaneously. The following interaction equation should be used for load combinations. ( ) Vert. 5/3 Load SWL Vert. Horz. ( ) Load Horz. 5/3 + < 1 SWL 105

106 106 B A A D C B C D A A D 30RLP 30RLPTW D C A A B E B C D A A D 40RLP F G H H 6RLP A B C D F G H 3" 8" N/A N/A -1/4" 4-3/4" 3" 15RLP 0RLP 0RLCP 6RLA 30RLP 30RLPTW A B C D F G H -1/4" 9" 1" 4-1/" -1/4" 4-3/4" 4-3/4" 30RLA 40RLP A B C D F G H -1/4" 3-3/4" 3/4" 4-1/" -1/" -1/4" 4-3/4" 40RLA 30RLCP A B C D E F G H 4" 4-3/4" 7/8" 3-1/8" 6" 1-1/8" 4-3/4" -3/8" 30RLC 40RLCP A B C D E F G H 6-3/8" 4-3/4" 7/8" 3-1/8" 6" 1-1/8" 4-3/4" 4-3/4" 40RLC 15RLA 0RLA A B C D F G H 4" 8" N/A N/A -1/4" 4-3/4" -3/8" A B C D F G H 4" N/A 7/8" 7-7/8" 1-1/8" 4-3/4" -3/8" 0RLC 40RLA F G H H 6RLA F G H H 15RLA 0RLA F G H H 30RLA F G H H 40RLC F G H H 30RLC 30RLCP 40RLCP 6RLP 15RLP 0RLP 0RLCP

107 Rapid-Lok Stud Location with Bearing Point Reference Ultimate Assembly Capacities CAUTION: These ultimate capacities are for the steel assemblies only and do not consider the concrete embedment. The designer must use the appropriate load factors per code and specifications. U-stiffners, Embedment Plates and Angles Fy=36,000 psi Triangular Stiffners Fy=50,000 psi Concrete Embedment Studs fut=65,000 psi Interconnecting Studs fut=70,000 psi ➀ØVn Limited by design shear times number of connecting studs in shear = n(.65)asefut Rapid-Lok Model MB Item Number 6RLA 6RLP 15RLA 15RLP 0RLA 0RLP Rapid-Lok Assembly Type 6 KIP - 4" 15 KIP - 4" 0 KIP - 6" Vertical Load Eccentricity e.5".5" 4" Ultimate Assembly Capacities Vertical Horiz. ØVn➀ ØVn ➁ ØVn➂ ØNn ➃ 40 kips 80 kips 80 kips 43.9 kips 63.7 kips 60.6 kips 18. kips 3.1 kips 47.4 kips 46. kips 60. kips 46. kips Rapid-Lok ➁ØVn Limited by design tension times number of connecting studs in tension times vertical lever arm divided by the eccentricity (e) listed = n(.75)asefuty/e & RLA8 0RLP8 0RLC1 & 0RLCP 0 KIP - 8" 0 KIP 7-7/8" Corbel 4" 6" 80 kips 80 kips 60.6 kips 55.8 kips 6.5 kips 46. kips 130 kips 46. kips ➂ØVn Limited on 6 kip unit by non-stiffened angle = (.9)Fybt /4(e-1) ØVn Limited on Standard-Units by triangular stiffener = (.85)Fybzt ØVn Limited on corbel units by u-stiffener = (.75)(1.8)Fy 1/A+x (e-x )/I & RLA 30RLP 30RLA 30RLPTW 30RLC1 & 30RLCP 30 Kip - 8" 30 Kip Thin Wall 30 Kip 7-7/8" Corbel 5" 5" 6" 0 kips 0 kips 80 kips 79.7 kips 79.7 kips 10 kips 93.7 kips 69.3 kips 93.7 kips 46. kips 130 kips 46. kips ➃ØNn Limited by design tension times number of connecting studs in tension = n(.75)asefut & RLA 40RLP 40RLC1 & 40RLCP 40 KIP 8-1/" 40 KIP 7-7/8" Corbel 5" 6" 0 kips 0 kips 139 kips 155 kips 5 kips 00 kips 138 kips 69.3 kips This data is for designers using ultimate strength design per PCI, 7th edition or ACI 318. Meadow Burke does not recommend using or accept liability for unfactored loads in excess of those listed as Working Loads in this document. Note: Proper installation of the Rapid-Lok Bearing Angle and/or Corbel is indicated by the bearing surface being properly positioned at the center/corners of the Diamond Holes. No load is to be applied to the Rapid-Lok assembly until these units are fully and properly engaged

108 Accessories and Options RAPID-LOK STUD EXTENDER (US PATENT NO. 6,494,639 ) The MB Stud Extender is designed as an adjustable height support chair for embed/weld plates. The Stud Extender eliminates the tedious, labor-intensive wood forming or risky "wet setting" of embed plates in the top-face of a concrete panel. Stud Extender Advantages: easy to use eliminates wood framing saves time saves materials consistent accuracy screed and finish panels easily The MB Stud Extender is a simple, easy to use solution for setting weld plates. This easy to use product is inexpensive, yet produces enormous savings of time and materials. 5" PLASTIC COVER FOR 0 KIP-8" AND 30 KIP RAPID-LOK Precasters often install concrete corbels at great expense to the Rapid-Lok Bearing Angle for improved aesthetics. The NEW Plastic Cover for the 0 kip-8" and 30 kip Rapid-Lok will completely conceal all three open sides of the Rapid-Lok Bearing Angle, similar to that of a concrete corbel or concrete ledge in a conventional precast, cast-in-place or tilt-up scenario. Just simply snap the cover into place fastening to the gussets of the existing Rapid-Lok Bearing Angle Assembly. Double Tee A simple but effective concrete colored plastic cover that attaches to the existing angles of the 0 (MBRLC0) and 30 kip (MBRLC30) Rapid-Lok Bearing Angle Assembly. The Plastic Cover for Rapid-Lok eliminates all the safety issues associated with installing a concrete corbel to a precast, cast-in-place or tilt-up panel by reducing the weight and ergonomic concerns of hanging a large piece of concrete. Rapid-Lok Plastic Cover The Plastic Cover for Rapid-Lok was thoroughly tested to ensure that it will perform exceptionally well, even in extreme conditions. It holds its shape and resists impact damage at temperatures approaching zero and exceeding 5ºF. Although it normally remains in place once installed, the cover can be detached and reattached dozens of times if needed without deforming. Back View Item Number MBRLC0 MBRLC30 Description Plastic Cover for 0-8" kip Rapid-Lok Plastic Cover for 30 kip Rapid-Lok 108

109 Erector Connector System Erector Connecttor The Erector Connector System is a unique solution designed to effectively connect adjoining concrete double tees or concrete wall panels. The System is comprised of a Type A and Type B connector and faceplates for easy installation. Optional System products include a magnetic face plate and tension reinforcement bars

110 Erector Connector System Solves This Problem: Traditional slug and flange connections often require multiple slugs to bridge the gap. Three to four welds later, super-heated concrete begins to crack, and connections distort. After only a few months in service, many joints crack, leak and need costly repair. There have been many precast systems developed to connect double tees. Most systems are cast into the edge of the flanges, and are bridged with welded slugs or plates. These connections take two, and often three or four welds per joint. The intense heat of the multiple welds often compromises the concrete around these connections. The photos above show the most common problems facing precasters and owners; multiple welds, cracks and leaking joints. This labor-intensive process and associated problems can reoccur hundreds of times in the course of a project. The typical connector does not address the problem that is causing the failures. The problem starts the minute welds are made, when the slugs and concrete start to cool and contract. The stress is immediately evident with the bowing of the connector face plate. It normally gets worse, as the connector is required to withstand the cyclic loading for the working life of the structure. The Problem: Continue to make the flange-to-flange connections in the same manner, and you can expect the same poor results, requiring the same costly repairs. No traditional connector system can make the connection with the flexibility required without cracking the concrete. The MB Solution The MB Erector Connector solves all of these issues with just one weld. MB Erector Connector System features a Type-A and Type-B Connector. To connect, pull the end of the extraction tie until the integral weld plate contacts the Type-B Connector. One weld completes the connection. Combined with a properly sealed joint, the Erector Connector creates a crack and leak free joint. The Solution: The MB Erector Connector creates a stress-free connection with true flexibility. Bridging the Gap: The joint width can vary from zero inches to over one inch. With the Erector Connector there is no need for plates, slugs or multiple slugs. To connect the Erector Connector, simply pull the nylon pull tie, sliding the weld plate until it contacts the adjacent Connector, and make one 3" long x 1/4" fillet weld. One weld, one joint! The Resulting Connection: One weld, no slugs, no tension cracks, no repairs translates into significant savings in time, material and money

111 How to Relieve Stress In wall-to-wall connections How it Works: The MB Erector Connector eliminates 100% of the tension loads to the connection, while maintaining a high resistance capacity to horizontal and vertical shear. To complete the connection, pull on the nylon tie and slide the weld plate until it is flush against the adjacent Type-B Erector Connector, then simply make a single 3" x 1/4" fillet weld. Type-A Type-B Vertical and Horizontal Applications: Wall-to-Wall Flange-to-Flange Flange-to-Wall Wall-to-Wall Meadow Burke s Erector Connector is a uniquely engineered system, designed to effectively connect adjoining concrete double tees and/or concrete wall panels. The System is comprised of a Type-A and Type-B Erector Connector and faceplate. Optional material and components include a magnetic holding plate and a stitch plate. Type-A + Type-B Joint Width 0" One Weld* Type-A + Type-B Joint Width 1"+ One Weld Erector Connecttor Joint widths can vary from 0" to more than 1", and are compensated with standard Type-A/B Erector Connectors Note: With joint widths of less than 1/", the sealant can exceed its movement rating. It is recommended that the Mag-Lok DTM be used. DTA will create an acceptable width joint of at least 1/", even if the tees are in direct contact. This simple reusable product is another solution to stress-free and leak proof joints. Standard Components: Type A-B Connection Standard Plastic Face Plate: Zero and 3.6º Weld Plate Pull Tie Type-A Connector Type-B Connector Optional Magnetic Retention Frame: Zero and 3.6º 1-1/4" Nylon Mounting Pin: Use to attach to steel edge forms ECMP Mounting Options: There are a series of DTM Rubber mounting plates, each designed for a specific edge form and mounting hole layout. Custom DTM shapes are also available

112 Add welds to increase strength Type-A + Type-B one weld Type-B + Type-B two welds Type-A + Type-B two welds Type-A + Type-A w/wo stitch plate one or two welds Panel/Flange Erector Connector Thickness Configuration Average Load (lbs) Design Load Number of Welds 99% (lb) Typical Joint Type Tension w/o Shear - Monotonic & Cyclic In-Plane Tension - Monotonic In-Plane Tension - Cyclic In-Plane Shear w/o Tension - Monotonic In-Plane Shear w/o Tension - Cyclic Out-of-Plane Shear - Monotonic In-Plane Shear w/o Tension - Monotonic In-Plane Shear w/o Tension - Cyclic In-Plane Shear with Tension - Monotonic In-Plane Shear - Tension - Cyclic Type-A +Type-B Type-A +Type-B Type-A +Type-B Type-B +Type-A Type-A +Type-A Type-B +Type-B Type-B +Type-A Type-B +Type-A Type-A +Type-A Type-A +Type-B Type-A +Type-B Type-A +Type-B Type-A +Type-B Type-A +Type-B Type-A +Type-B Type-A+Type-A Type-A+Type-B Type-B+Type-B Type-B+Wall Plate** Type-A+Type-A Type-A+Type-B Type-B+Type-B Type-B+Wall Plate** Type-B+Type-B Type-B+Wall Plate** Type-B +Type-A Type-A +Type-A Type-B +Type-A Type-B +Type-A Type-A +Type-A Type-B +Type-A Type-B +Type-B Type-B +Type-A Type-B +Type-B Type-A +Type-A Type-B +Type-A one one one two one (two w/ stitch plate) two two two one (two w/ stitch plate) one one one one one one one (two w/ stitch plate) one two two one (two w/ stitch plate) one two two two two two one (two w/ stitch plate) two two one (two w/ stitch plate) two two two two one (two w/ stitch plate) two Zero Load* Zero Load* Zero Load* Average Load (lbs) 4,100 6,500 7,090 3,600 Average Load (lbs) 3,300 6,600 Average Load (lbs) 13,600 15,900 1,400 Average Load (lbs) 11,900 16,500 19,00 Average Load (lbs),040,040,840,840 4,530 4,530 4,80 4,80 6,810 6,810 Average Load (lbs) 16,900 10,700 3,400 Average Load (lbs) 9,600 9,500 17,600 17,600 Average Load (lbs) 15,00 15,00 Average Load (lbs) 11,500 10,0,000 6,100 10,000 15,100 1,610 1,610 1,40 1,40 3,930 3,930 3,640 3,640 5,60 5,60 7,500 7,700 9,900 6,900 Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Expansion Joint Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Expansion Joint Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Expansion Joint Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Expansion Joint Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange Flange to Flange * The Type-A + Type-B configuration is installed using only one weld. This design eliminates all tension stresses through the use of the sliding weld plate. The weld plate is attached to the Type-B side only, allowing the plate to slide in and out of the Type-A side without loading either side in tension. This eliminates all tension loads and all cracking normally associated with the expansion and contraction of these joints. This Type-A + Type-B configuration is still capable of resisting all applied In-Plane and Out-of-Plane loads as listed above. **Typical Weld Plate Connection. 1

113 The MB Expansion Joint The typical Not So Perfect Expansion Joint requires additional weld plates, long steel angles, above-the-head welding and an unsightly, labor intensive joint. The MB Erector Connector Expansion Joint Solution features simplicity of design, ease of installation, and a fast connecting process. The solution uses MB Erector Connector Type-A on each side of the joint. Once the tees are resting in their final position, extract the internal weld plates about half way. Place the 3" x " x 3/8" thick MB Stitch Plate directly on top on the extracted plates and make the 3" long x 1/4" fillet weld on each edge of the plate from the topside of the Tee, not from underneath. The 3/8" plate gives all the adjustment needed. Joint width can be exactly what is desired by engineering, from " to 4" or more, matching perfectly the deck side expansion joint. The Erector Connector Expansion Joint can be set low in the thickness of the flange, to accommodate many standard expansion joint products. A minimum 4" flange thickness is required when used with a winged joint as shown, and a flange thickness of 3-1/4" with expansion joint systems 3/4" thick or less. Adding two additional welds under the stitch plate will increase stiffness of the expansion joint. The final benefit is the appearance from the underside of the double tee. The Solution photo has every angle removed, and is accomplished with less labor. Creating the Leak Proof Double Tee Flange-to-Flange Joint Tough Problem, Simple MB Solution: The problems can start from tees being placed flange contacting flange, leaving no space for preparing the joint, let alone the sealant. Secondly, if the wrong flange connectors are used, cracking often occurs from tension stresses when normal expansion/contraction occurs or from dynamic loads from moving traffic in a parking garage. The MB Solution includes the Mag-Lok DTM Joint Creator, the MB Erector Connector and an equally high quality Sealant. STEP 1: Attach the MB Mag-Lok DTM to the full length of each edge of the double tee forms (can also be used at the tee ends). DTM is available in 60' lengths. Erector Connecttor STEP : Install the MB Erector Connector as required for the flange to flange connection. This is an integral part of the MB Leak Proof Joint System, due to the zero tension loading. STEP 3: Place the concrete, standard or SCC. The DTM creates the 1/4" chamfered edge and the perfect reveal to receive the sealant. Custom profiles are also available. The Problem: The Solution: Mag-Lok DTM The MB Solution creates the leak proof double tee joint: Use the Mag-Lok DTM, the MB Erector Connector, and a sealant of equal high quality. This small product contributes to solving a huge problem. See the Mag-Lok Chamfer and Reveal literature for additional detail. STEP 4: Remove the double tee from the form, and the DTM from the tee edges. The DTM is placed/stored on the form for immediate reuse. Note that break away edge forms are not needed when using the DTM. STEP 5: Place the tees, prep the joint, apply the primer, backer rod and install the sealant. The DTM joint accommodates the correct recess level of the sealant, 1/8" below the surface and 1/" maximum sealant depth. Follow sealant manufacturer s installation instructions and recommendations. The leak proof joint has been created using the Mag-Lok DTM. The MB Erector Connector will continue to support the joint system by maintaining flangeto-flange alignment, resisting and supporting loads, while eliminating all tension cracking. This joint solution from Meadow Burke allows the job to be finished correctly. Simple and Final innovation to your bottom line! 113

114 The MB Erector Connector Expansion Joint Solution Typical Winged Joint* Erector Connector Type-A MB Stitch Plate Erector Connector Type-A * ISO-Flex or equal Add welds to increase strength Mag-Lok DTM Sealant Backer Rod Sealant Backer Rod MB Erector Connector Wall Stair Landing Double Tee 114

115 Halfen Anchoring System The Halfen Anchoring System offers a variety of engineered channel-type anchors to meet the demands of today s precast concrete industry. Easy installation, flexibility of design, high strength, durable and performance proven are all features of the System. Halfen 115

116 Halfen Anchoring System TYPICAL PANEL RESTRAINT ANCHOR INSTALLATION Halfen Panel Restraint Anchors are provided with nail holes for the express purpose of fastening the anchor to the form. There are no large holes in the channel of the anchors and all anchors supplied are foam-filled, thus eliminating the possibility of concrete seeping into the anchor during concrete placement

117 Halfen Anchoring System C D HALFEN PANEL RESTRAINT ANCHOR The Halfen Panel Restraint Anchor is comprised of two hot rolled anchors welded to a 6 low profile, high strength channel. The anchor is supplied with the whole length of the channel foam filled to prevent concrete seepage into the channel. Various attaching members can be inserted into the channel and turned 90 to lock them in place. Nail holes are provided in the channel for attaching the unit to the form. Standard length of the Panel Restraint Anchor is 6 with other lengths being readily available. Refer to the table for dimensions and safe working loads. The anchor is available in plain or hot dip galvanize finish and in stainless steel on special order (A factor of 0.85 shall be applied to load values marked with * when stainless steel material is selected). 6 Long E ANCHOR CHANNEL SELECTION CHART Anchor HDG HT3506 HT4506 HT5506 HT6506 TA Channel Mill Finish HT3506 MF HT4506 MF HT5506 MF HT6506 TAMF Load Direction Pull-out Shear Pull-out Shear Pull-out Shear Pull-out Shear Ultimate lb 6,650* 7,550 9,000 9,600 11,50* 11,950 1,00* 0,050 Capacity (kn) (9.6) (33.6) (40.0) (4.7) (50.1) (53.) (94.3) (89.) Basic Design Load Wind Load M Edge Distances Dimensions lb (kn) lb (kn) A In (mm) B In (mm) C In (mm) D In (mm) E In (mm),00* (9.8),900* (9.8) 3 (76) (51),500 (11.1),500 (11.1) 3-1/ (90) (51) 1-1/ (38) 5/8 (17) 3-1/8 (79) 3,000 (13.3) 3,000 (13.3) 3 (76) (51) 1 Panel Restraint Anchors can be supplied with I-anchor turned 90º to avoid conflict with prestressing tendon, specify Type L when ordering. Table is based on 5,000 psi unreinforced, normal weight concrete and a 3:1 safety factor. 3,00 (14.) 3,700 (14.) 4 (10) (51) 1-9/16 (40) 7/8 () 3-5/16 (84) 3,750* (16.7) 5,000* (.3) 4 (10) 3 (76) 4,000 (17.8) 4,000 (17.8) 5 (7) 3 (76) (50) 1-3/16 (30) 3-5/8 (9) 7,050* (31.4) 7,050* (31.4) 5 (7) 4 (10) 6,700 (9.8) 6,700 (9.8) 8 (03) 4 (10) -1/16 (5) 1-5/16 (34) 5-1/4 (134) Halfen To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCES CONCRETE PANEL A m B m ANCHOR CHANNEL RESTRAINT STRAP WELDED TO STRUCTURAL STEEL Shear Shear PULL-OUT LOAD 117

118 Halfen Anchoring System HALFEN PANEL RESTRAINT ANCHOR NEAR EDGE The Halfen Panel Restraint Anchor Near Edge is comprised of a hot rolled anchor and a pipe sleeve welded to a 6 low profile, high strength channel. This anchor is designed for applications where zero end clearance is required. A length of bent rebar is fitted into the pipe sleeve on the back of the anchor to help distribute loads deeply into the concrete. The anchor is supplied with the whole length of the channel foam filled to prevent concrete seepage into the channel. Attaching members for use with HT5506 is compatible with this product and can be inserted into the channel and turned 90 to lock them in place. Nail holes are provided in the channel for attaching the unit to the form. Standard length of the Anchor is 6. Other lengths are readily available. Refer to the sketches for dimensions and table for safe working loads. The anchor is available in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. ANCHOR CHANNEL SELECTION CHART Anchor HDG HT5506 E Channel Mill Finish HT5506 EMF Load Direction Pull-out Shear Ultimate lb 7,300,000 Capacity (kn) (3.5) (53.4) Basic Design lb,450 4,000 Load (kn) (10.9) (17.8) Table is based on 5,000 psi unreinforced, normal weight concrete and a 3:1 safety factor. To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. " 13/16" " REBAR 3 1/" MIN. 5" MAX. EDGE OF PANEL 7" MIN. EDGE DISTANCE NEAR EDGE ANCHOR 6 1/8" REBAR TO BE FITTED INTO PIPE SLEEVE ON BACK OF CHANNEL BEFORE PLACING FORM

119 Halfen Anchoring System HALFEN PANEL RESTRAINT ANCHOR INSULATED The Halfen Panel Restraint Anchor Insulated is comprised of two pipe sleeves welded to a 6 low profile, high strength channel. Two straight lengths of rebar are fitted into the pipe sleeves prior to placing the anchor into the form to handle the stresses involved. The anchor is supplied with the whole length of the channel foam filled to prevent concrete seepage into the channel. Attaching members for use with HT5506 is compatible with this product and can be inserted into the channel and turned 90 to lock them in place. Nail holes are provided in the channel for attaching the unit to the form. Standard length of the Anchor is 6. Other lengths are readily available. Refer to the sketches for dimensions and to the table for safe working loads. The anchor is available in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. ANCHOR CHANNEL SELECTION CHART FOR INSULATED PANELS Anchor Channel HDG Mill Finish HT5506 R HT5506 RMF Load Direction Pull-out Shear Ultimate lb Capacity (kn) Basic Design lb Load (kn) 5,50 (3.3) 1,750 (7.8),000 (53.4) 4,000 (17.8) Table is based on 5,000 psi unreinforced, normal weight concrete and a 3:1 safety factor. " 13/16" 6" LONG 1) When used in solid panels up to 6" thick, ultimate pull-out loads can be increased to 9,400 lbs. To Order Specify: Quantity, name and item number. Halfen INSULATED PANEL ANCHOR EDGE OF PANEL " REBAR 7" MIN. EDGE DISTANCE " MIN. THICKNESS 3" MIN. INSULATED PANEL 6" MIN. 7" X 3" CUT-OUT IN MESH REBAR TO BE FITTED INTO PIPE SLEEVE IN BACK OF CHANNEL BEFORE PLACING INTO FORM

120 Halfen Anchoring System HALFEN PANEL RESTRAINT ANCHOR TEE BOLT The Halfen Panel Restraint Anchor Tee Bolt is a special tee-head bolt designed for use with the Panel Restraint Anchors. Various bolt diameters and lengths are available to meet specific requirements. Refer to the table for dimensions and/or allowable loads. Note that item numbers ending in 0 are plain finish, ending in 1 are electroplated and ending in are hot dip galvanized. One corresponding nut is supplied with each Tee Bolt. Stainless steel is available on special order. For Use With HT3506 HT4506 HT5506 & HT6506 TA Bolt Diameter Strength Grade Allowable lb Tension Load (kn) Allowable lb Shear Load (kn) Lengths mm (in) 30 (1-1/4) 35 (1-3/8) 40 (1-1/) 45 (1-3/4) 50 () 60 (-3/8) M (1/ ) 4.6 Std.,500 (11.1) 1,650 (7.3) BD34 x BF3411 x BH34 BJ3411 M16 (5/8 ) 4.6 Std. 4,650 (0.7) 3,100 (13.8) BD35 x BF3511 x BH35 BJ3511 M (1/ ) 8.8 Hi Tensile 5,00 (3.1) 3,450 (15.4) x x x BG441 x BJ441 TEE-BOLT SELECTION CHART Tee Bolt capacity may be limited by the capacity of the anchor channel. To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. M16 M (5/8 ) (1/ ) 4.6 Std. 8.8 Hi Tensile 8.8 Hi Tensile 4.6 Std. 4,650 9,650 5,00 4,650 (0.7) (4.9) (3.1) (0.7) 3,100 6,450 3,450 3,100 (13.8) (8.7) (15.4) (13.8) Tee-Bolt & Nut Part Numbers S x x BD5511 x x x x BG4511 BF451 x BF5511 x x BG541 x BH45 x x BH5511 BJ4511 BJ451 BJ541 BJ5511 M16 (5/8 ) 8.8 Hi Tensile 9,650 (4.9) 6,450 (8.7) x x BF55 x x BJ Std. 7,50 (3.3) 4,850 (1.6) x BE5611 x BG5611 x x M0 (3/4 ) 8.8 Hi Tensile 15,050 (67.0) 10,050 (44.7) x x x BG561 x BJ561 HALFEN PANEL RESTRAINT ANCHOR SPRING NUT The Halfen Panel Restraint Anchor Spring Nut is available for use with HT5506 and HT6506TA Panel Restraint Anchors. When the spring nut is inserted into the channel of an anchor the attached spring will hold the nut in its desired position or it can easily slide up or down as necessary. Available only in 5/8 and 3/4 diameters to fit the two anchors mentioned above. The spring nut is available electroplated only. SPRING NUT SELECTION CHART For Use With Nut Size Allowable lb Tension Load (kn) Allowable lb Shear Load (kn) HT5506 & HT6506TA 5/8 UNC 3/4 UNC 4,900 (1.8) Do Not Use 4,900 (1.8) 4,000 (17.8) Part Numbers LP9511S LP9611S Spring Nut capacity may be limited by the capacity of the anchor channel. To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. 0

121 Halfen Anchoring System HALFEN PANEL RESTRAINT ANCHOR STRAP The Halfen Panel Restraint Anchor Strap is designed especially for use with the various Panel Restraint Anchors. They are engineered to fit the anchor channels and fabricated from 3/8 thick x wide steel plate. They are available in the lengths shown in the table in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. Halfen Anchor Channel Cast into Panel Site weld restraint strap to structure For Use With HT3506 & HT4506 HT5506 & HT6506 TA Allowable lb Tension Load (kn) Allowable lb Shear Load (kn) Projection PANEL RESTRAINT ANCHOR - STRAP DATA,750 (.) 3,550 (15.8) Part Number 7,900 (35.1) 4,550 (0.) inches (mm) Mill Finish Hot Dip Galv Mill Finish Hot Dip Galv 4 (10) * * HR5040 HR504 5 (7) * * HR5050 HR505 6 (15) HR3060 HR306 HR5060 HR506 8 (03) HR3080 HR308 HR5080 HR (54) * * HR5100 HR510 (305) HR30 HR3 HR50 HR5 14 (355) * * HR5140 HR (406) * * HR5160 HR (457) * * HR5180 HR518 Strap capacity may be limited by the capacity of the anchor channel. Halfen To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. 1

122 Halfen Anchoring System HALFEN SPOT INSERT The Halfen Spot Insert is comprised of a 1-3/4 channel with a hot rolled anchor welded to its back. It is an economical, adjustable anchor for light-duty use, such as window and doorframe anchoring. Spot Inserts are supplied foam-filled and with nail holes for fastening to the form. Spot Inserts are available in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. D 1 3/4" SPOT INSERT SELECTION CHART Part HDG Number Mill Finish Allowable lb Pull-out Load (kn) Allowable lb Shear Load (kn) C in (mm) Dimensions D in (mm) E in (mm) HT00 HT00 MF 1,100* (4.9) 1,000 (4.5) 1-1/8 (8) 9/16 (15) 3 (75) HT300 HT300 MF,00* (9.8),00 (11.1) 1-1/ (38) 5/8 (17) 3-1/16 (77) Table is based on 5,000 psi unreinforced, normal weight concrete and a 3:1 safety factor. Minimum edge distance 3 from center of insert in any direction. C E Notes: Capacities marked* may be increased by 1/3 for wind-induced loads. HALFEN spot inserts can be supplied with L-anchors rotated 90º to avoid conflict with pre-stressing tendons. To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. HALFEN SPOT INSERT TEE BOLT The Halfen Spot Insert Tee Bolt is a special tee-head bolt designed for use with the Spot Insert. Various bolt diameters and lengths are available to meet specific requirements. Refer to the table for dimensions and/or allowable loads. Note that item numbers ending in 1 are electroplated and ending in are hot dip galvanized. One corresponding nut is furnished with each Tee Bolt. TEE-BOLT SELECTION CHART CHART For Use With HT00 HT300 Bolt Diameter M10 M M16 (3/8") (1/") (5/8") Strength Grade (Std.) (Std.) (Std.) Allowable lb 1,700,500 4,650 Tension Load (kn) (7.6) (11.1) (11.1) Allowable lb 1,150 1,650 3,100 Shear Load (kn) (5.1) (7.3) (13.8) Lengths mm Tee-Bolt & Nut Part Numbers 30 (1-1/4) BD3 BD34 BD35 40 (1-1/) BF311 BF3411 BF () BH311 BH34 BH35 Tee bolt or locking plate, see next page Pull-out Load Shear Load To order, specify: quantity, name and item number.

123 Halfen Anchoring System HALFEN SPOT INSERT LOCKING PLATE Spot Insert Locking Plate is available in several bolt diameter sizes for use with the Spot Insert. The locking plate accepts appropriate size NC threaded bolts. Refer to the table for bolt diameters and allowable loads. It is available with electroplate finish. SPOT INSERT LOCKING PLATE DATA For Use With HT00 HT300 Locking Plate Size Allowable lb Tension Load (kn) Allowable lb Shear Load (kn) 1/4 UNC 450 (.0) 450 (.0) 5/16 UNC 630 (.8) 630 (.8) 3/8 UNC 1,90 (5.7) 1,90 (5.7) 1/ UNC 1,90 (5.7) 1,90 (5.7) Part Numbers LP111 LP11 LP3311 LP " typical anchor spacing To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. 8" spacing on one end HALFEN DOUBLE-TEE STEM ANCHOR HALFEN DOUBLE-TEE STEM ANCHOR DATA Load Condition Allowable Design Load Equivalent Uniform Load HDT9100 has 5 ramps per length. HDT has 3 ramps per length 1" Pull-out load on single bolt Pull-out load on bolt pair Allowable lb Shear Load (kn),000 lb (8.9 kn),900 lb (.9 kn) 1,650 lb (7.3 kn),400 lb/ft (35.0 kn/m) 3,480 lb/ft (50.8 kn/m) 1,980 lb/ft (8.9 kn/m) Halfen Part Number Length HDT9100 0'-0" (6,096mm) Double-Tee Stem HDT '-0" (3,048mm) Notes: 1) Allowable loads include a safety factor of 3, based on concrete strength of 5,000 psi (34.5 MPa). ) Check interaction using ( ) ( ) T actual 5/3 V actual 5/3 <1.0 TA VA Single bolt shear load Strand " strand height 3) Hot dip galvanized finish and foam-filled. 4) Site cutting to length may be carried out, however cut must be no further than 1-1/" (38mm) from anchor. Single bolt pull-outload 5) This product can be readily supplied with alternate ramp heights to suit different strand positions. 6) Also available is stainless steel. To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. Bolt pair pull-out load. Bolts at minimum 3" centers. Note: Single bolts or bolt pairs to be at minimum 10 centers. 3

124 Slotted Inserts The Burke Barrier Reflector Connector The Burke Reflector Connector channel and t-bolt assembly are easy to install, reusable, and eliminate the need for on-site drilling. Standard and custom channel lengths are available to fit various precast form lengths and to provide on-site installation and adjustability of glare screens. This innovative system improves worker safety, reduces installation time, and significantly lowers labor costs. Features Include: No field drilling Channel and t-bolt design Hot rolled channel welded I-anchors Black memory foam Custom lengths available Flush surface fit Hot dip galvanized finish Benefits Include: Worker safety No damage to concrete or reinforcing steel No drills, bits, large bolts, or templates required Labor savings from installation Minimize repairs and replacement of barriers Reduced construction time Easy installation, reusable t-bolts and nuts High strength product with high pull out capacity UV inhibitor prevents sunlight deterioration Prevents ice and water accumulation Use in any form length Stackable Less storage space required Pre-install all glare screens, reflectors, signs, etc. Corrosion protection Halfen 815 HTA: Series Anchor Channels Spot insert One I-Anchor Point Load Load Configuration Short Anchor Channel Two I-Anchors Point Load Short Anchor Channel Two I-Anchors Load Pair Short Anchor Channel 3 I-Anchors Load Pair F F F F Part Number HT00 HT506 HT508 HT110 HT1 HT506 HT508 HT110 HT1 HT510 HT5 HT518 HT4 Channel Length 1-3/4 (45) 6 (15) 8 (03) 10 (54) (305) 6 (15) 8 (03) 10 (54) (305) 10 (54) (305) 18 (457) 4 (610) (mm) Min Distance Between Load Points (51) (51) 3 (76) 4 (10) 3 (76) 3 (76) 6 (15) 8 (03) (mm) Allowable Loads Pull-Out (Ta) lb. (kn) 1,100* (4.9) 1,00* (5.3) 1,00* (5.3) 900* (4.0) 700* (3.1),100* (9.3),00* (9.8) 1,500* (6.7) 1,00* (5.3),00* (9.8),00* (9.8) 1,800* (8.0) 1,400* (6.) Shear (Va) lb. (kn) 1,000 (4.5) 1,000 (4.5) 1,000 (4.5) 1,000 (4.5) 1,000 (4.5) 1,500 (6.7) 1,500 (6.7) 1,500 (6.7) 1,900 (8.5) 1,900 (8.5) 1,900 (8.5) 1,900 (8.5) 1,900 (8.5) Continuous Lengths to (6070mm) I-Anchors at 5 (7mm) centers Point Loads Equivalent Uniform Load HT (6070) 5 (7) 1,00* (5.3),640* 38.5 lb/ft kn/m a) 1,000 (4.5) ( ) a) 1, lb/ft kn/m Material: Hot dip galvanized carbon steel. Also available in type 304 stainless steel (A) and type 316 stainless steel (A4) Continuous Lengths to (6070mm) I-Anchors at 10 (54mm) centers Corner Anchor 90 degrees 4 i-anchors Point Loads Equivalent Uniform Load HT100 HT5 X B (6070) (305) 10 (54) 3 (76) 700* (3.1) 840*.3 lb/ft kn/m 1,00* (5.3) lb/ft kn/m a) 1,000 (4.5) ( ) a) 1, lb/ft kn/m ( ) 1,000 (4.5) lb/ft kn/bolt 4

125 Slotted Inserts 1" 1" DS-5 DOVETAIL ANCHOR SLOT The DS-5 Dovetail Anchor Slot is available in two sizes, 6 gauge and 4 gauge galvanized metal. The units are 1 x 1 with a 5/8 opening and are furnished with nail holes for easy attachment to the form. The Dovetail Anchor Slot is sold in 10 lengths in 50 bundles. It can be readily cut to any length at the job site. 5/8" To order, specify: quantity, name and size. MX-55 BURKE SLOT INSERT The MX-55 Burke Slot Insert is a high strength precast insert designed for use with threaded straps. The unit has a sealed nut box to prevent concrete from leaking into the insert. Removal of the perforated slot-seal exposes the slot for quick connection of the strap. The insert is available in two styles: one furnished with a 3/4" NC threaded nut and one that is supplied with a 3/4" coil nut. Three insert heights are available: all are 6-1/ long and are available in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. A F E B 0.5 DIA. D C MX-55 SLOT INSERT DIMENSIONS Item Number A B C D E F /4 Coil Nut Nut Model Item Number 3/4 N.C. NUT MODEL A MX-55 SLOT INSERT MODELS Finish Weight Item Number 3/4 COIL NUT MODEL A Finish Weight 3/4 N.C. Nut Halfen 7961Y Mill 1.6 lbs. 7961B Mill 1.6 lbs. 7961YG Galv B Galv Y 3 Mill B 3 Mill YG 79641Y 3 4 Galv Mill B 79641B 3 4 Galv Mill Threaded Strap MX YG 4 Galv B 4 Galv 3. MX-55 SLOT INSERT LOAD CAPACITIES Insert Ultimate Loads in Pounds Type of Force Position Depth 3 Depth 4 Depth Field Field Tension Shear 13,400 lbs. 18,170 15,550 lbs. 18,170 19,30 lbs. 18,170 #3 Grade 60 x 4 Reinforcing through each hole. L-bend 7 x 17 Side Tension 8,430 13,460 15,60 Side Shear 9,080 10,500 10,500 Corner Tension 7,950 13,790 17,950 Corner Shear 9,000 9,930 11,30 End Tension 4,00 10,310 14,011 End Shear 15,453 16,583 18, Ultimate loads based on 5000 psi minimum concrete strength.. Loads tested at 3/4" eccentricity from concrete surface. To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. 5

126 Slotted Inserts MX-5 BURKE SLOT INSERT STUD STRAP The MX-5 Slot Insert Stud Strap is used in conjunction with the Slot Insert supporting a 3/4" NC threaded nut. The Stud Strap is screwed into the insert s nut, rotated to the correct angle and then securely locked in position by the strap s free-running jam nut. The MX-5 is manufactured with ASTM A57 grade 50 steel. The bolt used with the strap meets or exceeds the minimum physical material properties of A57 grade 50 steel. MX-5 BURKE STUD STRAP Item Number Length Width Thickness Weight L W (G) lbs (G) (G) (G) To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. MX-7 SHELF INSERT MX-7L SHELF INSERT LONG The MX-7 Shelf Insert and MX-7L Shelf Insert Long are cast inserts designed with a built-in wedge for adjustment purposes. These inserts are used primarily for secondary connections and are not intended for use in attaching precast panels to the building s mainframe. The Shelf Inserts are used in conjunction with special shaped 3/4" bolt, nut and washers (shown below). Refer to the table for insert dimensions and safe working loads. C D B A Item MX-7 MX-7L Item Number (Mill) Item Number (Galv) MX-7 & MX-7L MEADOW BURKE SHELF INSERT Bolt Size 3/4 3/4 Safe Work Load (lbs),500 4,000 Safe working loads reflect a 3:1 safety factor in 4,000 psi concrete. * Combined shear and tension load must be checked through interaction equations. To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. Concrete PSI 4,000 4,000 Weight Per 100 (lbs) A B C D -1/ -7/16 1-1/4 1-5/16-5/16-3/8 3-7/8 5-1/ 6

127 Slotted Inserts MB-7 SHELF INSERT ASKEW HEAD BOLT MN-7 SHELF INSERT HEX NUT MW-7 SHELF INSERT ROUND WASHER MS-7 SHELF INSERT SHIM WASHER The MB-7 Shelf Insert Askew Head Bolt, MN-7 Hex Nut, MW-7 Round Washer and MS-7 Shim Washer are used in conjunction with the Shelf Inserts above. The 3/4" diameter Askew Head Bolt is manufactured with a special shaped head to match the slope of the insert s internal wedge. The bolt is available in five lengths: 1-1/,, -1/, and 3-1/. Use caution with the bolt to avoid over-tightening. The MN-7 Shelf Insert Hex Nut has a 3/4" diameter NC thread to match the Askew Head Bolt above. The MW-7 Shelf Insert Round Washer is a 3/4" washer used under the Hex Nut. The MS-7 Shelf Insert Shim Washer is used between the insert and attaching plate, when required to solidify the connection. The shim is available in 1/8 and 1/4" thickness. To order, specify: quantity and name, plus the length for the bolt and the thickness for the shim washer. MN-7 MB-7 Halfen MW-7 MS-7 7

128 8

129 Welded Wire Girders for Composite Panels and Slabs The need for more efficient construction has guided the concrete industry into designing more cost effective and energy efficient precast wall panels. This progress initiative has evolved into the composite panel design that allows both inner and outer concrete wythes to be load bearing. The key to a good composite action design is an effective shear and moment connection that will distribute the stresses to both wythes. Meadow Burke has designed and developed the Welded Wire Girder to meet the unique challenges of composite panel construction. It is designed to properly transfer and distribute the loading to the wythes without having any problematic solid sections between the wythes. The Welded Wire Girder connects the wythes through the insulating material and is designed to expand and contract with the independent thermal-induced movements of the outer wythe without causing any high stress points. The Welded Wire Girder System allows for 100% composite action between the two concrete wythes and the insulation. Wire Girders 9

130 Welded Wire Girders for Composite Panels R RATING The R Rating is the measure of heat loss given for thermal transmissions. In the design of insulated concrete panels, one major hurdle to overcome was when breaks in the insulation allowed concrete from the two wythes to flow together creating a thermal bridge and allowing major heat transmission through the panel. The use of the Welded Wire Girder System minimizes this thermal bridging. INSULATED PANEL HEAT DELAMINATION When the inside wall of an insulated concrete wall panel is exposed to fire or excess heat, the inside wythe will expand more rapidly than the outside concrete wythe. This action will cause the panel to bow inwardly and seriously decrease the strength of any reinforcing steel in the panel as the heat increases. Use of the Welded Wire Girder System adds structural reinforcement to the panel and helps to minimize wythe separation and/or delamination. WELDED WIRE GIRDER INSTALLATION Most precast panels will space the girders on two feet centers for easy reinforcement consideration and the availability of two-foot insulation board. Keeping the insulation at a two feet width consistency from panel to panel will reduce installation errors and standardize production. INSTALLATION SEQUENCE Install bottom wythe reinforcing mesh, place the Welded Wire Girders and tie to the mesh. Pour the bottom wythe concrete. Lift or rotate the Welded Wire Girders to make sure two-thirds of the girder stands above the concrete wythe. Install the two-foot sections of insulation board. Press the insulation in and around the girder s diagonal wires. Tape or caulk any gaps in the insulation material to prevent concrete seepage. Install top wythe mesh. Tie the mesh to the girder and make sure it is positioned properly in the center of the wythe. Place the top wythe concrete. Installation is complete

131 Single Welded Wire Girders for Composite Panels WELDED WIRE GIRDER SINGLE Welded Wire Girder Single is fabricated from two substantial wires laced together by a continuous diagonal wire. The girder is designed specifically to solve the need for an effective way to handle shear and movement in precast composite panels. The Welded Wire Girder Single is available in heights from -3/4 to 9-1/ and in lengths from 3-11 to Welded Wire Girder Single is available in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, height, length and finish. * * * ± 5/3 W.W. Girder Type (single) MS 030 MS 383 MS 363 MS343 MS Top Wire Diagonal Wire Bottom Wire Diameter Wire Area As Diameter Wire Area As Diameter Wire Area As mm mm mm For additional design information or more examples, contact your local Meadow Burke Service Center. mm mm mm WELDED WIRE GIRDER DOUBLE The Welded Wire Girder Double is fabricated from three substantial wires laced together by two continuous diagonal wires. The girder is designed specifically to solve the need for an effective way to handle shear and moment in precast composite floor panels. The Welded Wire Girder Double is available in heights from -3/4 to 9-1/ and in lengths from 3-11 to Welded Wire Girder Double is available in plain or hot dip galvanize finish. To Order, Specify: quantity, name, height, length and finish. TOP WIRE Maximum Size: Minimum Size: 6/0 Gauge inch diameter 3 Gauge -.44 inch diameter Wire Girders BOTTOM WIRE Maximum Size: Minimum Size: 6/0 Gauge inch diameter 8 Gauge inch diameter DIAGONAL WIRE Maximum Size: 3 Gauge -.44 inch diameter Minimum Size: 8 Gauge inch diameter Maximum Size: -3/4 (.76) High Girder - 6 Gauge -.19 inch diameter Minimum Size: 40% of area of top or bottom wire HEIGHT OF GIRDER Maximum Height: 9-5/8 (9.84 inch) Minimum Height: -3/4 (.76 inch) LENGTH Standard Length: 40 0 * Minimum Length: 3 11 * For length over 40 0 consult Meadow Burke. Wire tensile strength exceeds ASTM A8-07 standards. May be designed for yield strength of 60 KSI. A = dia. of diagonal wire ± 5/3 A 131

132 13

133 Meadow Burke NC Threaded Inserts and Accessories Meadow Burke NC threaded inserts and accessories are designed and manufactured to efficiently distribute bolt stresses into the concrete. Testing and field use have proven their performance. They provide the builder with confidence that their construction requirements will be met with quality structural connections. NC Threads 133

134 NC Threaded Inserts PC-11 THREADED INSERT The PC-11 Threaded Insert is a cast-in-place, high strength plastic insert available in three sizes for use in fastening and/or hanging equipment, plumbing, etc. to the concrete. This cost-effective insert can be attached to the form using the proper size NC bolt or nailed to the form using the proper NC plug. (see MX-8 and FC-18 NC threaded plugs on page 139) B L A Bolt Size 3/8 1/ 3/4 Diameter A 3/4 3/4 1 Description Diameter B 1 1-3/8 1-5/8 PC-11 NC THREADED INSERT Safe Work Load (Tension) Dimension L 1-1/ -5/8 3-1/4 Safe working loads based on 3,000 psi concrete and a 3:1 safety factor. 1) Minimum spacing between inserts is two times the minimum corner distance. To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. 600,880 3,400 MB Item Number Pieces Per Package 1, Weight Per Package MX-3 HI-TENSILE INSERT The MX-3 Hi-Tensile Insert is a ductile iron cast in place NC insert available for use in fastening and/or hanging equipment, plumbing, mechanical fixtures, etc. to the concrete. It is also used very effectively as a diaphragm insert in prestressed bridge beams. The Hi-Tensile Insert is available in the sizes shown in the table. Attachment to the form can be accomplished by utilizing the nail lugs on the insert, an NC bolt run through the form wall, or by using FC-18 or MX-8 NC threaded plugs (see page 139). Item Number N0031 N003 N0033 N0034 N0035 N0036 N0038 Bolt Diameter 1/4 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4 7/ /8 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/ 1-5/8 1-3/4 A 9mm 9mm 3mm 35mm 38mm 41mm 45mm Dimensions 1-5/8 1-5/8-1/4-3/4 3-3/8 4 L 41mm 41mm 57mm 70mm 86mm MX-3 HI-TENSILE INSERT 5/ /8 1-1/ 1-5/8 16mm 5mm 35mm 38mm 41mm 48mm 1 1 3/4 15/16 1-1/8 1-1/ 5mm 650 lbs..9kn 5mm 1,000 lbs. 4.4kN 600 lbs. 900 lbs..7kn 4.0kN 600 lbs. 900 lbs..7kn 4.0kN 19mm 1,680 lbs. 7.5kN 1,500 lbs. 6.7kN 1,500 lbs. 6.7kN 4mm,700 lbs..0kn,100 lbs. 9.3kN,600 lbs. 11.6kN 8mm 4,05 lbs. 17.9kN,984 lbs. 13.3kN 3,650 lbs. 16.kN 10mm 1-3/4 45mm 1-3/16 30mm 5,000 lbs..kn 3,950 lbs. 17.6kN 4,800 lbs. 1.4kN 4-1/ 114mm 1-7/8 C Thread Depth Shear Tension 000 psi (13.8mPa) Tension 3000 psi (0.7mPa) 38mm 6,000 lbs. 6.7kN 4,800 lbs. 1.4kN 5,900 lbs. 6.kN L Safe working loads based on 3,000 psi concrete and a 3:1 safety factor. 1) Safe working load is based on the insert setback 1/" from the concrete surface. To order, specify: quantity, name and item number

135 NC Threaded Inserts FX-51 FERRULE INSERT OPEN The FX-51 Ferrule Insert Open is a high strength, highly versatile insert available for numerous precast concrete applications. It is available in 3/4", 1, 1-1/4 and 1-1/ bolt diameters and in the different lengths displayed in the table. The insert is constructed with a NC threaded coil, shaped struts (could be two, four or six depending on the model) and an expanded wire coil. The efficient design increases the shear cone surface area thus increasing the load capacity of the insert. The Ferrule Insert Open is available with an optional mounting washer for easy nailing to the form. The insert is available in plain or electroplated finish. 1/8" FX-51 FERRULE INSERT OPEN DATA Bolt Diameter Length L Safe Work Load (Tension) Safe Work Load (Shear) In. In. lbs. lbs. In. In. In. In. 3/4 4 1/ /16 1 5/8 3/8.375 B C W Wire Diameter D Edge Distance (Tension) 4 In. 7 Edge Distance (Shear) 5 In. L 7/8 5 1/ /16 1 5/8 7/ / /16 1 5/8 7/ / /16 1 5/8 7/ /4 7 1/ / 1/ 3 1/ /4 9 1/ / 1/ 3 1/ / 9 1/ /16 1. SWL based on 3000 psi concrete compression strength.. SWL includes a 3:1 safety factor. 3. Inserts must have a 1/" setback. 4. Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of the insert. 5. Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge. 6. Minimum anchor spacing shall be x the edge distance for tension and 3x the edge distance for shear. To order, specify: quantity, name, item number, optional washer and finish. 1/ 3 1/ L W FS- FERRULE INSERT STANDARD The FS- Ferrule Insert Standard is machined from solid L14 bar stock and is available in the bolt diameters shown in the table. All Meadow Burke ferrules have standard NC threads and have a closed end to prevent concrete seeping into the ferrule. Minimum bolt engagement for all standard ferrules is bolt diameter plus 1/8. Maximum bolt engagement for standard ferrules is shown in the table. The Ferrule Insert Standard is available in plain and electro plated finish and in Type 304 stainless steel on special order. B Ferrules may be substituted in any standard coil product desired. There is no capacity reduction of an insert when this substitution is made. Ferrules and coils (of same diameter) will have the same load carrying capacities. NOTE: ferrules with an open end and ferrules in lengths other than those shown in the table are available on special order. Contact your local Meadow Burke Service Center for more information. NC Threads FS- FERRULE INSERT - STANDARD DATA Bolt Diameter Threads Max Bolt Engagement L B 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4 7/ /4 1 1/ / /8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 3/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1/ 1/ 9/16 11/16 7/ /8 1 3/8 1 11/16 To order, specify: quantity, name and item number

136 D NC Threaded Inserts FX- FERRULE INSERT STRAIGHT LOOP The FX- Ferrule Insert Straight Loop is a versatile insert commonly used for structural connections and as an anchor for suspension of pipes and/or other mechanical equipment. Refer to the table for bolt diameters and lengths available. The insert is available in plain, electro plated or stainless steel finish. B C L Bolt Diameter 1/" 1/" 5/8" 5/8" 3/4" 3/4" 7/8" 1" 1" Length L 4 1/8" 6 1/8" 4 1/8" 6 1/8" 4 1/8" 6 1/8" 6 1/8" 6 1/8" 8 1/8" SWL (Tension) lbs FX- FERRULE INSERT - STRAIGHT LOOP DATA SWL (Shear) lbs Mechanical SWL lbs B 1 1/16 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 9/16 1 3/8 1 11/16 1/8 1/8 C 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 1/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 Number of Struts Wire Diameter Edge Distance (Tension) Edge Distance (Shear) SWL based on 3000 psi concrete compression strength.. SWL includes a 3:1 safety factor. 3. Inserts must have a 1/" setback. 4. Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of the insert. 5. Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge. 6. Minimum anchor spacing shall be x the edge distance for tension and 3x the edge distance for shear. To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. D FX-5 FERRULE INSERT LOOP The FX-5 Ferrule Insert Loop is a versatile insert commonly used to make structural connections and to suspend pipes and/or other mechanical equipment. Refer to the table for bolt diameters and dimensions. The insert is available in plain, electro plated or stainless steel finish. B C L R Bolt Diameter 3/8 1/ 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 Length 3/4 3/4 3 1/ 3 1/ 6 6 FX-5 FERRULE INSERT - LOOP DATA Safe Work Load (Tension) 1, lbs Safe Work Load (Shear) 1, lbs B 1 1/16 1 1/8 1 1/ 1 3/4 1/16 1/8 C 1 1/4 1 3/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 R 9/16 9/16 13/16 13/16 1 3/8 1 3/8 Wire Diameter D Edge Distance (Tension) Edge Distance (Shear) SWL based on 3000 psi concrete compression strength.. SWL includes a 3:1 safety factor. 3. Inserts must have a 1/" setback. 4. Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of the insert. 5. Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge. 6. Minimum anchor spacing shall be x the edge distance for tension and 3x the edge distance for shear. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number

137 NC Threaded Inserts B C FX-14 FERRULE INSERT THIN SLAB The FX-14 Ferrule Insert Thin Slab consists of a ferrule and four deformed wire struts. It is designed to attach thin panels to the building frame or to attach or suspend plumbing or mechanical equipment. The insert is available in 3/4" and 1 bolt diameters and in plain, electro plated or stainless steel finish. H D W Bolt Diameter 3/4" 1" mm 19 5 Insert Height H 3 1/8 4 1/8 mm Safe Work Load (Tension) lbs. kn FX-14 FERRULE INSERT - THIN SLAB DATA 1 3/4 1/8 B C W mm /8 1 5/8 mm / mm Wire Diameter D mm Minimum Edge Distance mm Safe working loads based on 3,000 psi concrete and a 3:1 safety factor. 1) Safe working load is based on the insert setback 1/" from the concrete surface. ) Minimum spacing between inserts is two times the minimum edge distance. To Order, Specify: quantity, name and item number. FX-16 FERRULE INSERT THIN SLAB STRUT The FX-16 Ferrule Insert Thin Slab Strut is fabricated with two 4 wire struts welded to a standard ferrule. Sizes and dimensions are shown in the table. This insert is used effectively in small-envelope areas. The Ferrule Insert Thin Slab Strut is available in plain, electro plated or stainless steel finish. B H D FX-16 FERRULE INSERT - THIN SLAB STRUT DATA Bolt Diameter Safe Work Load (Tension) H B Wire Diameter (D) mm lbs. kn mm mm mm 3/8" /4" 3 9/16" 14.6" 6.7 1/" /8" 35 11/16" 17.6" 6.7 5/8" /8" 41 7/8".6" 6.7 3/4" /8" 41 1" 5.6" 6.7 7/8" /8" /8" 35.6" 6.7 1" /8" /8" 35.6" 6.7 Safe working loads based on 3,000 psi concrete and a 3:1 safety factor. 1) Safe working load is based on the insert setback 1/" from the concrete surface. NC Threads To order, specify: quantity, name and item number

138 NC Threaded Inserts 1/8" D B FX-19 FERRULE INSERT WING The FX-19 Ferrule Insert Wing is also available for use where panel thickness is limited. This insert is available in 1/" through 1 bolt diameters and offers better tension loads than other thin slab inserts. It is available in plain, electro plated or stainless steel finish. H C W Bolt Diameter 1/ 3/4 3/4 1 1 H 1 3/8 3/8 3 1/ 3 1/ 4 1/ Safe Work Load (Tension) lbs FX-19 FERRULE INSERT - WING DATA Safe Work Load (Shear) lbs W 4 1/ 4 7/8 4 7/8 5 1/8 5 1/8 B 1 1/8 1 3/4 1 3/4 1/8 1/8 C 1 3/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 1 5/8 Wire Diameter D Edge Distance (Tension) Edge Distance (Shear) SWL based on 3000 psi concrete compression strength.. SWL includes a 3:1 safety factor. 3. Inserts must have a 1/" setback. 4. Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of the insert. 5. Minimum corner distance shall be 1.5x minimum edge distance for shear when loaded towards the edge. 6. Minimum anchor spacing shall be x the edge distance for tension and 3x the edge distance for shear. To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. MX-5 PRECAST CONCRETE INSERT The MX-5 Precast Concrete Insert is a handy, cast-in-place metal insert for many of the common attachment applications involving precast construction. It is available in bolt diameters from 1/4" through 3/4" and in a range of lengths to satisfy job requirements. Refer to the table for dimensions and safe working loads. This insert can be attached to the form using the MX-8 or FC-18 NC threaded plug shown below. A MB Item Number MX-5 MEADOW BURKE CONCRETE INSERT General Reference Number Bolt Size A B L P15T 1/4-0 3/8" 13/16" 1-1/" P4T 3/8-16 9/16" 1" 1" P5T 3/8-16 9/16" 7/8" 1-3/8" P35T 1/ /8" 1-1/4" 1-1/" P36T 1/ /16" 1-3/8" -7/8" P45T 5/ /16" 1-3/8" 1-11/16" P46T 5/ /16" 1-1/" -7/8" P55T 3/ /16" 1-5/8" 1-11/16" P56T 3/ /16" 1-9/16" 3" Safe Work Load (lbs) 575 1,05 1,00 1,5,05 1,575,500 1,75 3,5 Weight Per 100 (lbs) Edge Dist. (Tension) 3" " 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3-1/" 3-1/" L B 1. Safe working loads based on 3,000 psi concrete and a 3:1 safety factor.. Minimum edge distance apply to edges only. All other edges require x length of the insert. To order, specify: quantity, name and item number

139 NC Threaded Inserts MX-8 PLUG METAL NC THREAD The MX-8 Plug Metal NC Thread is available to fit all 3/8, 1/", 5/8 and 3/4" diameter NC threaded inserts. The plug has a nail hole in the center that allows it to be securely fastened to the form. An insert is then screwed on to the plug to complete the insert setting process. This plug provides a 1/4" setback. To order, specify: quantity, name and diameter. FC-18 PLUG PLASTIC NC THREAD The FC-18 Plug Plastic NC Thread is the plastic version of the metal NC plug listed above. It functions as a setting plug and as a thread protection. This is an excellent and economical unit to use in inserts cast in place but not to be used until a later date. This plug provides a 1/4" setback. To order, specify: quantity, name and diameter. FC-17 CAP PLASTIC FERRULE The FC-17 Cap Plastic Ferrule is a plastic plug that is press-fit into the threaded opening of the coil to protect the threads from the elements and from concrete seepage. It is available in 1/8 increments from 3/8 to 1 diameters. To order, specify: quantity, name and diameter. FC-19 TIE HOLE PLUG Tie FC-19 Hole Plug is a plastic plug available in 9/16 and 3/16 diameters used to temporarily fill holes in the formwork plywood. Tie Hole Plugs are sold in carton lots only. To order, specify: quantity, name and diameter. RL-71 CHAIN GUARD The RL-71 Chain Guard is made from a durable plastic and is used to protect the edges of precast panels from spalling caused by transportation chains or strapping. The Chain Guard is available in the two sizes: 1-3/4 and 4-1/4. RL-71 MEADOW BURKE CHAIN GUARD DATA Size MB Item Pieces Per Number Package 1-3/ / To order, specify: quantity, name and size. Weight Per Package NC Threads RL-73 PANEL PAD The RL-73 Panel Pad is a -1/ x 6 heavy-duty plastic spacer that is positioned between precast concrete panels during storage and/or transportation. To order, specify: quantity and name

140 Precast Miscellaneous Products RL-75 SHIMS - STANDARD RL-75 Shims - Standard are available in convenient thickness and sizes shown in the table. They are designed to assure accurate spacing and leveling of precast panels. They have excellent stabillity and will not rust or stain the concrete. RL-75 MEADOW BURKE SHIMS - STANDARD DATA Description MB Item Pieces Per Number Package x x 1/ ,000 x x 1/ ,000 x x 1/ ,000 3 x 3 x 1/ ,000 3 x 3 x 1/ ,000 3 x 3 x 1/ x 4 x 1/ ,000 x 4 x 1/ ,000 x 4 x 1/ x 4 x 1/ x 4 x 1/ x 4 x 1/ x 4 x 1/ x 6 x 1/ x 6 x 1/ x 6 x 1/ Weight Per Package To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. RL-76 SHIMS - SUPER RL-77 SHIMS - SUPER PAK The RL-76 and RL-77 Shims - Super Pak is an extremely tough polyvinyl material with a compressive strength of 8,000 psi. They are designed to quickly adjust for uneven footing and/or panels. RL-77 Super shims can be purchased in case packages containing 30 sets of six 4 x 6 shims. Each set contains the following mix of shims: one 1/16 (yellow), two 1/8 (black) and three 1/4 (gray). Bulk packages of the RL-76 individual shims are also available. Item RL-76 RL-76 RL-76 RL-77 RL-77 RL-77 RL-77 RL-76 & RL-77 MEADOW BURKE SHIMS - SUPER DATA Description 4 x 6 x 1/16 4 x 6 x 1/8 4 x 6 x 1/4 Super Shim Pack 1/16 Thick - 1 Pcs 1/8 Thick - Pcs 1/4 Thick - 3 Pcs MB Item Number To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. Weight Each (lbs) RL-76 RL-77 FG-7 FORM GASKET FG-7 Form Gasket is a highly compressible, adhesive-backed foam tape used to prevent leakage through the form joints. It is available in three sizes: 1/4 thick x 3/8 wide in 1,000 roll, 1/4 x 3/8 in 1,000 roll and 1/ x 1/ in 660 roll. FG-7 MEADOW BURKE FORM GASKET DATA Description MB Item Pieces Per Number Package 1/4 x 3/8 x 1, /4 x 1/ x 1, / x 1/ To order, specify: quantity, name and size. Weight Per Package

141 Prestress Products All Meadow Burke Sure-Lock prestress chucks are manufactured to rigorous specifications from high quality, high strength steel. They are properly heat-treated, inspected (including a 100% magnaflux inspection) and tested to provide the user with a quality product they can use with confidence. CAUTION: Meadow Burke Sure-Lock prestress chucks are precision manufactured devices that require maintenance and periodic inspection. Complete inspection and maintenance information is available from your Meadow Burke representative. Failure to read, understand and adhere to the inspection and maintenance instructions can result in hazardous situations for workers and possible damage to products and/or facilities. Prestress 141

142 Prestress Chucks SURE-LOCK SPLICE CHUCK MULTIPLE USE The Sure-Lock Splice Chuck Multiple Use assembly includes the bodies, coupler, springs and jaws with rubber o-rings. Refer to the table for strand size and item number. Multi-use transition (splicing two strands of different sizes) splice chucks are available on request. Individual replacement parts are available and are shown in the table. Strand Size /16-9/16 1/-1/ 7/16-7/16 3/8-3/8 11/3-11/3 5/16-5/16 1/4-1/4 7mm-7mm 5mm-5mm Chuck # F4600 F456 F4500EL F4437 F4375 F4343 F43 F450 F476 F4197 SURE-LOCK SPLICE CHUCK - MULTIPLE USE DATA MB Item # Jaw Coupling Body Assembly # Part # Part # F600J F56J F500JEL F437J F375J F343J F3J F50J F76J F197J F3CP F3CP FCP FCP FCP F1CP F1CP F1CP F1CP F1CP F11B F11B F10B F10B F10B F9B F9B F9B F9B F9B Back Plate & Spring # F3BP/F3S F3BP/F3S FBP/FS FBP/FS FBP/FS F1BP/F1S F1BP/F1S F1BP/F1S F1BP/F1S F1BP/F1S Weight (lbs) To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. SURE-LOCK STRAND CHUCK MULTIPLE USE The Sure-Lock Strand Chuck Multiple Use assembly includes the bodies, coupler, springs and jaws with rubber o-rings. Refer to the table for strand size and item number. Multi-use transition (splicing two strands of different sizes) splice chucks are available on request. Individual replacement parts are available and are shown in the table. Strand Size /16 1/ 7/16 3/8 11/3 5/16 1/4 7mm 5mm Chuck # F1600 F156 F1500EL F1437 F1375 F1343 F13 F50 F76 F1197 MB Item # SURE-LOCK STRAND CHUCK - MULTIPLE USE DATA Jaw Assembly # F600J F56J F500JEL F437J F375J F343J F3J F50J F76J F197J Retaining Ring # F3R F3R FR FR FR F1R F1R F1R F1R F1R Body Part # F3B F3B FB FB FB F1B F1B F1B F1B F1B Cap Part # F3C F3C FC FC FC F1C F1C F1C F1C F1C Spring Part # F3S F3S FS FS FS FS F1S F1S F1S F1S Weight (lbs) To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. 14

143 Prestress Chucks ANCHOR CHUCK MULTIPLE USE The Sure-Lock Anchor Chuck Multiple Use assembly includes the body and three-piece jaw with a rubber o-ring. Refer to the table for strand size and item number. Individual replacement parts are available and are shown in the table. Strand Size 5mm 7mm 1/4 5/16 11/3 3/8 7/16 1/ 9/ All part numbers are trademarks of Precision Post Tension SURE-LOCK ANCHOR CHUCK - MULTIPLE USE DATA Jaw Retaining Body Chuck # MB Item # Assembly # Ring # Part # F197 F76 F50 F3 F343 F375 F437 F500EL F56 F F197J F76J F50J F3J F343J F375J F437J F500JEL F56J F600J F1R F1R F1R F1R F1R FR FR FR F3R F3R F4B F4B F4B F4B F4B F5B F5B F5B F6B F6B Weight (lbs) SPLICE CHUCK ONE TIME USE Sure-Lock Splice Chuck One Time Use assembly includes the body, threaded end caps, spring spacer and two-piece wedges with wire rings. Refer to the table for strand size and item number. Multi-use transition (splicing two strands of different sizes) splice chucks are available on request. A clear zinc coating is available, if corrosion resistance is required. Strand Size 1/4 3/8 7/16 1/ 0.6 SURE-LOCK SPLICE CHUCK - ONE TIME USE DATA Chuck # MB Item # Description F650 F6375 F6437 F6500 F Splice Chuck Splice Chuck Splice Chuck Splice Chuck Splice Chuck Weight (lbs) STRAND CHUCK ONE TIME USE The Sure-Lock Strand Chuck One Time Use assembly includes the body, two-piece wedges with or without wire rings. Threepiece wedges are also available in many sizes. Refer to the table for strand size and item number. Individual replacement parts are available and are shown in the table. A clear zinc coating is available, if corrosion resistance is required. Strand Size 1/4 3/8 7/16 1/ 1/ 1/ Chuck # F550 F5375 F5437 F5500 F5500R F5500R3 F5600 F5600R3 SURE-LOCK STRAND CHUCK - ONE TIME USE DATA MB Item # Description Chuck / piece w/o Ring Chuck / piece w/o Ring Chuck / piece w/o Ring Chuck / piece w/o Ring Chuck / piece w/o Ring Chuck / 3 piece w/ Ring Chuck / piece w/o Ring Chuck / 3 piece w/ Ring Body Part # F8B F8B F8B F8B F8B F8B F13B F13B Wedge Part # F50SL F375SL F437SL F500SLR F500SLR F500SL3R F600SL F600SL3R Description -Piece w/o Ring -Piece w/o Ring -Piece w/o Ring -Piece w/o Ring -Piece w/ Ring 3-Piece w/ Ring -Piece w/o Ring 3-Piece w/ Ring Weight (lbs) Prestress 143

144 PTJ-5S STRESSING JACK Precision offers a broad variety of jacks, including power-seaters and double-acting jack systems. Our 0-ton PTJ-5S jack system comes complete with jack, hydraulic pump, hose, gauge, jack grippers and gripper handle. This jack is a twin cylinder open-throat jack with a 10" stroke and can pull up to 1/" strand. Smaller sizes can be pulled by simply changing the jack grippers to match the size of strand to be pulled. BRUTE This is the newest jack available from Meadow Burke and Precision. Additional specifications are available upon request. Lifetime Warranty! PRESTRESS CHUCK TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES Meadow Burke maintains a supply of tools and/or accessories to aid in the prestress process. Items available include: Grease application systems Special formula chuck release compound Chuck removal tools Sliding hammers Cleaning brushes Replacement lube cartridges Contact your Meadow Burke representative for additional information

145 Prestress Strand Hold Downs PRESTRESS HOLD DOWNS Meadow Burke has been producing quality prestress strand hold down devices since All hold downs produced by Meadow Burke have dependable and predictable mechanical connections. There are no weld-dependent connections. PRESTRESS HOLD DOWN TECHNICAL AND SAFETY DATA All anticipated loads should be determined by a qualified structural engineer and should include an additional 5% for friction losses. Use the comparison of the total anticipated loading and the published safe working loads of the hold downs to select the appropriate hold down unit for the intended application. Exercise care in the hold down selection process. Hold downs are load rated by the unit and by individual strand. Both load ratings must be checked and compared. The lower of the two values is the controlling factor. Do not exceed either; use the next higher rated hold down, if necessary. The allowable number of strands per unit can be determined by dividing the unit s safe working load by the calculated individual strand load (include the 5% friction loss). It is extremely important for an engineer to verify loads when a hold down unit is used in a hold up application. This type of application usually produces a load double the hold down load and requires two hold up units to satisfy the safe work load requirement. It is imperative that high strength coil rod and heavy hex nuts be used in all hold down and hold up applications in order to ensure safe working loads. IMPORTANT: in prestress operations all working hardware must be periodically inspected and replaced if signs of wear or bending are present. Worn or bent bolts should be immediately discarded. Never use a worn or bent bolt for any purpose and never attempt to straighten a bent bolt. Discard any bolt or coil rod that is suspected of being used at loads of 70% or more of ultimate capacity. Prestress 145

146 Prestress Strand Hold Downs TYPICAL HOLD DOWN LOADING CALCULATIONS When calculating the forces at deflection points, additional attention must be given to the intermediate forces occurring at points B in the example diagram. These intermediate hold up forces are often double the hold down forces and will require two hold up units at each B point. V = Rise in strand A to C = 67-1/ = 5.65 ft. H = Horizontal distance A to C = 4 ft. T = Tension in one strand = 41,000 lbs. N = Number of deflected strands = 10 strands. PA = Uplift at Points A due to all deflected strands. PB = Down load at Points B due to all deflected strands. The example illustrates the method of calculating Hold Down loads in a given prestress strand deflection diagram, and also addresses the condition at points B and C. A) To determine forces at points A : PA = (V/H)(T x N) = (5.65 ft./4 ft.) (41,000 lbs. x 10 strands) = 54,910 lbs. B) Add 5% for friction, PA = 1.05 (54,910) PA = 57,660 lbs. uplift C) To determine forces at points B : Summation of all vertical forces must equal 0. FV = 0 Thus, 6 (PA) = (PB) + (PC) where, PC = PA 6 PA = PB + PA PB = PA = (57,660) PB = 115,30 lbs. Down B Caution: When hold down units are used as hold up units, they should only be used one (1) time as such. After close inspection, they should be discarded or used a final time as a hold down. Special hardness treatment can be obtained on special orders only, which may enable parts to be used more than once. Consult with Meadow Burke Engineering Department, Tampa, FL, for additional information. D) Use two () Hold Down units 6/68 KIP at each point B. E) Use one (1) Hold Down unit 6/68 KIP at points A

147 Prestress Strand Hold Downs STRAND HOLD DOWN 0K 0.6 Strand Rollers Standard on all Units and all Roller Bolts are Grade - 8 Hi-Strength. STRAND HOLD DOWN 0K DATA 0 KIP Series Model SWL per Unit (Kips) SWL per Strand (Kips) Number Vertical Rows of Strand Coil Thread Diameter () Horizontal Strand Spacing (a) Setback to 1st Strand (b) 1st to nd Strand Spacing (c1) Std. Vertical Spacing (c) Overall Width () (d) Weight Per M Unit (lbs) Add'l Wt. Strand Row (lbs) SH /4 N/A 3/ SH-4K 4 5 3/4 3 7/ SH-6K /4 3/ /16 4 3/ All 00 series hold downs have standard 3-1/ pitch thread in swivels and willengage MB Hi-Strength Coil Rod. All orders will be shipped with restrainers installed, unless otherwise specified.. B dimensions are measured from the bottom of the form to the 1st strand. Actual B dimensions will be 1/16" less for clearance. STRAND HOLD DOWN 40K 0.6 Strand Rollers Standard on all Units and all Roller Bolts are Grade - 8 Hi-Strength. STRAND HOLD DOWN 40K DATA 40 KIP Series Model SWL per Unit (Kips) SWL per Strand (Kips) Number Vertical Rows of Strand Coil Thread Diameter () Horizontal Strand Spacing (a) Setback to 1st Strand (b) 1st to nd Strand Spacing (c1) Std. Vertical Spacing (c) Overall Width () (d) Weight Per M Unit (lbs) Add'l Wt. Strand Row (lbs) SH N/A 3/ /16 3 1/ SH-456K /4 1/8 4 3/ SH / /16 4 3/ SH-455K / /16 6 7/ Prestress 1. All 400 series hold downs have standard 3-1/ pitch thread in swivels and will engage MB Hi-Strength Coil Rod. All orders will be shipped with restrainers installed, unless otherwise specified.. B dimensions are measured from the bottom of the form to the 1st strand. Actual B dimensions will be 1/16" less for clearance

148 Prestress Strand Hold Downs STRAND HOLD DOWN 60K 0.6 Strand Rollers Standard on all Units and all Roller Bolts are Grade - 8 Hi-Strength. STRAND HOLD DOWN 60K DATA 70 KIP Series Model SWL per Unit (Kips) SWL per Strand (Kips) Number Vertical Rows of Strand Coil Thread Diameter () Horizontal Strand Spacing (a) Setback to 1st Strand (b) 1st to nd Strand Spacing (c1) Std. Vertical Spacing (c) Overall Width () (d) Weight Per M Unit (lbs) Add'l Wt. Strand Row (lbs) SH N/A 1/ 3 1/ SH-656K 68* / 3/4 1/8 4 3/ SH / 1/ 4 3/ SH-655K /4 1/ 6 7/ Load of strands transferred to side frame material must not exceed 6 KIPS (see graphic below).. All 600 series hold downs have special 4 pitch thread in swivels and will engage only Meadow Burke Super 150 ksi Coil Rod. All units ordered will be shipped with restrainers installed, 3. B dimensions are measured from the bottom of the form to the 1st strand. Actual B dimensions will be 1/16" less for clearance. 68 KIP 6 KIP How To Order: Specify quantity, unit number, number of strands, B dimension, C dimension, and C1 dimension if required. Example: 50, SH-658, 10 strand, B=-1/", C=" (as shown in picture). Caution: Contact Engineering Department for ANY unit requiring a B dimension > 4-3/4" Total strand load shall not exceed unit safe working load

149 Prestress Products DT-1 PUSHDOWN 0.5 The DT-1 Pushdown 0.5 is made of ductile iron and is designed to hold 0.5 strands. It is available in four sizes to hold 3 strands, 5 strands, 8 strands and 10 strands. A 3/4 diameter hole in the top of the unit is used in conjunction with a tapered rod to position and hold the pushdown in place. The tapered rod should have an integral shoulder to bear on the top of the pushdown. Note that this product is not load rated. Product Code Number Item DT-1 #3 DT-1 #5 DT-1 #8 DT-1 #10 Number of Strands DT-1 PUSHDOWN 0.5 DATA (FOR 0.5 STRAND) Slot Width () Slot Length () Top Hole Diameter () Top Hole Depth () Maximum Width () To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. 149 DT-6 PUSHDOWN 0.6 The DT-6 Pushdown 0.6 is made of ductile iron and is designed to hold 0.6 strands. It is available in four sizes to hold 3 strands, 5 strands, 8 strands and 10 strands. A 3/4 diameter hole in the top of the unit is used in conjunction with a tapered rod to position and hold the pushdown in place. The tapered rod should have an integral shoulder to bear on the top of the pushdown. Note that this product is not load rated. Product Code Number Item DT-6 #3 DT-6 #5 DT-6 #8 DT-6 #10 DT-6 PUSHDOWN 0.6 DATA (FOR 0.6 STRAND) Number of Strands Slot Width () Slot Length () Top Hole Diameter () Top Hole Depth () Maximum Width () Prestress To order, specify: quantity, name and item number

150 Prestress Products DT-31 HOLD DOWN ANCHOR DT-35 HOLD DOWN ANCHOR The DT-31 Hold Down Anchor is made of ductile iron and is designed to hold two vertical rows of strands. It is available in two sizes to hold 0.5 strands (DT-31) or 0.6 strands (DT-35). The anchor can hold two vertical rows of two to four strands each. The maximum number of strands is eight. The unit is used in conjunction with a one-time use strand chuck to position and hold the hold down in place. Note that this product is not load rated. HOLD DOWN ANCHOR USE DATA (FOR 0.5 OR 0.6 STRAND) Product Code Number Item DT-31 DT-35 Number of Strands 8 8 Strand Diameter () Anchor Width () 3 3/8 4 Anchor Length () 4 13/ /16 Weight per 100 (lbs) To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. CH-7 STRAND CLAMP The CH-7 Strand Clamp is a ductile iron clamp used with 0.5 and 0.6 strands to position and hold bulkheads in place. To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. CH-9 STRAND RECESS PLUG The CH-9 Strand Recess Plug is a handy foam plug used to fill prestress voids to facilitate the patching process. The foam plug is 1-1/8 x1-1/8 x 3/4". To order, specify: quantity, name and item number. RD-8 DEBOND SPLIT TUBING The CH-31 Debond Split Tubing is flexible polymer plastic tubing used to prevent concrete from bonding to the prestressing strands. The tubing is shipped in 10 lengths and can be purchased in split or unsplit versions. CH-31 DEBOND STRAND SNAP Rigid two-piece construction High-Impact Plastic Patented design creates Tight "seal" Designed to be installed over tensioned strands Highly abrasive resistance Engineered rigidity maintains Shape to dissipate bursting stresses Fast and easy to install Available in 4, 10, and 0 lengths Installs on.5 and.6 strand sizes To order, specify: quantity, name and item number

151 Prestress Working Parts W CN-5 COIL NUT HEAVY CN-33 COIL NUT SUPER 150 HI STRENGTH The CN-5 and CN-33 Coil Nuts are manufactured from hex stock like the Standard Coil Nut, but is of sufficient length to develop the safe working load required for prestress applications. CN-33 Coil Nut is used with CR-5 Super High Strength Coil Rod only. L Item Number Type CN-5 CN-5 CN-33 Use with Strength Hold Down Series 0 Std. Hi Strength 0/40 Std. Hi Strength 60 Super Hi Strength CN-5 & CN-33 COIL NUT - HEAVY DATA Nominal Diameter 3/4 1 1 Thread Pitch 4 1/ 3 1/ 4 SWL (KIPS) Weight per 100 (lbs) L () 1 1/ W () 1 1/8 1 5/8 1 3/4 Table is based on a 1.5:1 safety factor for prestress applications. To order, specify: quantity, type and bolt diameter. CW-4 FLAT WASHER CW-4 Flat Washers are manufactured from high carbon flat steel plate and are designed to provide the required bearing against the form members. Refer to the table for dimensions and safe working loads. Item Number Type CW-4 CW-4 CW-4 FLAT WASHER DATA Use with Strength Nominal Diameter Size Hold Down Series 0 40/60 HVY HVY 3/4 1 1/ X 5 X 5 3/4 X 7 X 7 Weight per 100 (lbs.) Table is based on a 1.5:1 safety factor for prestress applications. To order, specify: quantity, type, name and bolt diameter. CR-4 COIL ROD HI-STRENGTH CR-5 COIL ROD SUPER 150 HI-STRENGTH Meadow Burke supplies two different types of coil thread: 1) 0 KIP and 40 KIP series uses standard hi-strength, 3-1/ pitch coil thread (CR-4). ) 60 KIP series uses Special Super 150 hi-strength, 4 pitch coil thread (CR-5). They are not interchangeable and cannot be mismatched. Use only Meadow Burke coil rod for all hold down application. Meadow Burke will not guarantee the SWL of any coil rod which has been field welded, bent and/or has worn threads. Coil Rod Threads must protrude through top of swivel to achieve SWL. Use two CN-5 Coil Nuts or one CN-5/CN-33 Coil Nut to develop Coil Rod SWL. Item Number Type CR-4 CR-4 CR-5 CONTINUOUS COIL ROD Use with Strength Nominal Thread Hold Down Dia. Pitch Series 0 Std.Hi Strength 3/4 4-1/ 0/40 Std.Hi Strength 1 3-1/ 60 Super Safety Factor is approximately 1.5:1 Coil Rod SWL (KIPS) Weight per CFL To order, specify: quantity, type, name, bolt diameter and length Prestress 151

152 15

153 Precast Chemicals Burke: The Brand You Trust! Concrete Repair Products Form Release Agents Epoxy Products Chemicals 153

154 BURKE PATCH An outstanding everyday concrete patch material. A single component, fast setting, polymer modified portland cement-based product. Economical Fast setting Superior workability Shrinkage compensating Resistant to abrasion Can be feather-edged when modified Packaging: 50 lb. bags 50 lb. pails BURKE FAST PATCH 30 A true high performance, one component, polymer modified, portland cement-based concrete patching compound. Fast setting Can trowel, shape and shave Integrated corrosion inhibitor Apply overhead or vertically Excellent bonding qualities Apply from feather edge to " Packaging: 50 lb. bags 50 lb. pails BURKE SUPER RUB A superior wall finishing product. Polymer modified, one component resurfacer for filling and smoothing interior and exterior vertical concrete and masonry surfaces. Self curing Excellent bond to old or new concrete Feather Edge to 1/" Architectual finish Non-shrink finish Excellent coverage Fills holes to 1/" Packaging: 5 lb. bags BURKE PLUG Quick setting hydraulic cement. Initial setting in 1-3 minutes Plugs holes, cracks and joints above or below grade Stops flowing water Seals leaks around pipes and conduits Packaging: 50 lb. pails ACRYLIC BOND A liquid acrylic polymer emulsion designed as an admixture for cement-based products. Solvent free Improves curing Increases tensile strength Improves workability Enhances adhesion Packaging: One gallon jug (4 per box) 154

155 BURKE PRECAST BIO RELEASE WB 100% biodegradeable, water-based form release agent. Organic / biodegradeable No petroleum distillates V.O.C. compliant Odorless Ready to use Releases concrete from plywood, steel and fiberglass Prevents concrete buildup Cleans and reconditions Helps to eliminate bugholes Packaging: 75 gallon tote 55 gallon drum 5 gallon pail BURKE PRECAST RELEASE A chemically active release agent specifically engineered to prevent bonding of concrete to forms and form liners. No waxes or silicones Reduces concrete buildup Reduces cleaning of formwork No residue, stains or discoloration Meets V.O.C. emission requirements for form releases (EPA limit <450 g/l V.O.C. content <50 g/l) Packaging: 75 gallon tote 55 gallon drum 5 gallon pail Epoxies BURKE E ANCHOR Two component, 100% solids, high modulus, structural epoxy gel. Solvent free No odor High strength Moisture insensitive Long working time (0 75º F) Anchors threaded rod bolts, rebard and smooth dowels Seismic anchoring and bracing Full depth concrete pavement repairs Packaging: 16 ounce BURKE E BOND Mult-purpose repair epoxy. Non-sag High strength Bonds to multitude of substrates Repairs holes and spaces in concrete Easy to use - (1:1 ratio) system Low V.O.C. content Overhead and vertical repair Packaging: 9 ounce Chemicals 155

156 156

157 Precast Bracing Hardware Bracing Hardware

158 A precast panel is not a completed wall immediately upon lifting. Braces are necessary to resist wind forces until permanent connections are made PRESSURE in PSF A number of variables will effect the amount of force Meadow Burke braces must resist. The amount of lateral pressure on newly erected precast panels will vary with wind velocity, the surface area of the panel and the presence or absence of openings. The chart on this page shows the pressure gradient for a 7 m.p.h. wind exerted on the panel. Wind velocity and therefore pressure, will depend on the geographical location of the building and seasonal conditions. The amount of this force will rise further if the wind is supplemented with either driving rain, blowing snow, or windblown dust and sand. Before selecting a brace type in the Bracing Tables, contact the local Meadow Burke Distributor to determine what equipment is available. When using the Bracing Tables, make certain the brace selected will reach between the available floor and wall panel without falling in an opening or conflicting with an obstruction. The following Precast Brace Spacing Tables A, B, C were developed using a minimum construction period wind speed of 7 m.p.h. with exposure C, based on ASCE This is the 90 m.p.h. basic wind speed modified by.8 to convert it to a one year mean recurrence interval for the construction period. The table incorporates minimum safety factors of 1.5 on the braces and.0 on the brace inserts. Contact Meadow Burke Engineering for assistance if site conditions or local codes require higher design wind pressure

159 Meadow Burke braces are designed for use with the Meadow Burke Brace Badger, Slam Anchor, Super Bolt, MB Brace Bolt, or with cast-in-place B- 75, BI-75 and BG-75 coil inserts only. The use of other types of inserts may reduce the capacity of the bracing system and therefore should not be used. In order to develop the full capacity of the brace inserts, the inserts must be embedded in concrete with,500 psi minimum concrete compressive strength, 5 inch minimum embedment and located 1 foot minimum from all concrete edges. Lesser embedments or lower concrete strengths will reduce the capacity of the brace insert and may reduce the allowable brace spacings shown in the tables or on the panel erection details. Meadow Burke does not recommend the use of expansion type inserts for attaching precast braces and assumes no responsibility if used. To achieve the spacings shown in the brace tables or on the panel erection details, the braces must be anchored to a concrete floor slab, footing or deadman with sufficient area, weight and strength to resist the applied brace loads. The braces are designed for attachment at top of floor slab elevation unless noted otherwise on the details. The floor slab has not been checked or designed by Meadow Burke. Using floor slabs, footings or deadmen of insufficient size or strength may result in failure of the brace system before the design wind load is reached. It is the users responsibility to have a qualified professional engineer design the floor slab, footing or deadman to insure that they are adequate to anchor the braces for this application. To assist the engineer, the applied design concentric brace load as determined by Meadow Burke Engineering for each brace is indicated on the panel detail sheets. The brace information shown herein reflects spacings for the resistance of wind load only. The effect of construction live loads, soil backfill loads, vertical and lateral loads, etc., have not been considered in the design of the brace tables or brace information shown on the erection details. It is the responsibility of others to determine the effect of such loads and provide additional bracing as required to support the panels. The vertical dimension of the wall brace insert above the floor slab, footing or deadman and the horizontal dimension to the floor brace insert from the face of the panel where the wall brace inserts are located is indicated in the brace tables for a specified panel height, or is shown on the panel erection details. Deviations from the dimensions shown in the tables or on the panel details may significantly reduce the indicated capacity of the braces. Whenever knee braces are used, continuous cross lacing is required. Knee braces must have positive connection at each end and connect at mid-span of the precast brace. Cross lacing must be continuous and have positive connection at the mid-span of 3/4 0 Wall Brace Insert (B-75 or BI-75) Meadow Burke Brace each precast brace and at the end of each cross lace line. The bracing recommendations contained herein apply to standard bracing situations for full height panels setting on footings and may not be applicable to all jobsite conditions. If this project has conditions that require a special brace design, the contractor should contact Meadow Burke Engineering for assistance. H V 3/4 0 Coil Insert 90 L Meadow Burke Brace L L Cross Lace (when required) Knee Brace and Cross Lace Connector Finished Floor (top of slab, footing or deadman) S Footing X 3/4 0 Slab Brace Insert (BG-75) or Super Bolt or MB Brace Bolt Bracing Hardware

160 Bracing Guidelines 1. Braces are designed to be placed in a plane at 90 degrees to the face of the panel. Skewing a brace will reduce the load carrying capacity of the brace. The maximum horizontal skew of the braces is limited to 5 degrees. A 5 degree skew is approximately equal to 1 inch skew for each inches the brace insert is placed from the face of the wall (see detail at lower right). The brace spacing shown in the tables or on the panel details must be reduced when the braces are skewed more than 5 degrees. Even when the brace spacings are reduced to account for the increased brace load, never skew a brace more than 10 degrees.. Due to the increased suction created on the back side of a panel with openings; do not increase the brace spacing for panels with openings, unless a complete wind analysis to determine the effects of the wind passing through the openings is performed. Knee Brace 3. Locate brace inserts 1 foot or more from all concrete edges and floor slab joints. 4. Locate brace inserts to provide clearance between the lifting hardware and braces. End Cross Lace Equal 5. Locate brace inserts symmetrically about the panel s center line whenever possible. 6. Locate the first brace insert from each end of the panel at a distance no greater than 5 percent of the panel s width or 10 feet, whichever is less. 7. Locate brace inserts to provide an equal wind load to each brace where possible. Do not exceed the allowable maximum width of panel per brace. The allowable maximum width of panel Knee Brace & Cross Lace Connector Cross Lace per brace is the maximum brace spacing shown in the appropriate S FF column of the brace tables or as indicated on the panel detail sheets. For braces placed at nearly equal spacings, the actual width of panel applied to each brace (Wn) may be calculated using the method shown below. For panels requiring unequal or unusual brace spacings contact Meadow Burke Engineering for assistance. Equal 90 +/-5 8. Brace inserts should not be placed lower than 60% of the panel s height and not less than 5% of the panel s height above the panel s geometric centroid or mass center of gravity, whichever is greater. W 1 = A + B Applied width of panel for Brace 1 W = B + C W 3 = W 4 = E + Applied width of panel for Brace C + D Applied width of panel for Brace 3 D Applied width of panel for Brace 4 A B C D E X 1 Brace Inserts W n = Actual Width of Panel Applied to Each Brace 5 X Max. Skew 160

161 Brace Table Legend The following brace spacing tables have been designed for a 7 m.p.h. wind with a 1 year mean recurrence interval and a 1.5 brace safety factor. The table should be used in conjunction with the notes and recommendations shown in the Brace Design Notes, on pages 155 and 156. SFF = Maximum brace spacing for a panel with a height below floor (or top of deadman when used) equal to FF feet. [ie., the S 0 column yields the maximum spacing for a panel with no height below floor, the S column yields the maximum spacing for a panel foot maximum height below floor, etc.] All dimensions are shown in units of feet. Always round the dimensions for the panel height below floor and the panel height above floor, to the next larger chart value. Reference brace detail on Brace Design Notes, on page 156. H = Height of panel above floor or top of deadman when used. V = Brace insert location from face of floor or top of deadman if used. X = Horizontal dimension to floor brace insert from the face of the panel where the wall brace inserts are located. L = Brace length for given V and X Bracing Hardware

162 For Brace Legend notes, please refer to page 161 Precast Brace Spacing Table A 16

163 For Brace Legend notes, please refer to page 161 Precast Brace Spacing Table B Bracing Hardware

164 For Brace Legend notes, please refer to page 161 Precast Brace Spacing Table C 164

165 For Brace Legend notes, please refer to page 161 Precast Brace Spacing Table D Bracing Hardware

166 Brace Load Table Brace Type Brace Length [ft.] M / Max. Ultimate Brace Buckling Load [kips] Ultimate Brace Shoe Load [kips] B / C / D / ,470 / L B / C / D [w/single knee brace & cross lace] Little G Standard G STD. G [w/single knee brace & cross lace] Big G Big G [w/single knee brace & cross lace] Big G [w/double knee brace & cross lace] MB Precast Brace - (4518HD) / / / / / / / / ,940 / L.439 6,300 / L.963 1,540,000 / L 4.118,350 / L ,700,000 / L ,50 / L ,90 / L / L MB Precast Brace - HD (4518EHD) 8.00 / L 13.5 Super Super Super + 5 Extension Super + 10 Extension Super 3 Super 3 + 5' Extension Super ' Extension Super ' & 5' Extensions Super Extension Super Super Notes: 1. L is the total brace length in feet.. The equations above for ultimate buckling loads are based on test results performed on the braces when they were placed at an angle of 60 degrees to horizontal. For brace angles between 45 and 60 degrees to horizontal, multiply the buckling load derived from the equations above by the factor K. K = ( Ø) 410 Where Ø = Brace angle to horizontal in degrees. Exception: K = 1 may be used for all Super Braces except for the Super + 10 Extension. 3. Do not use brace loads greater than the ultimate brace shoe loads above. Always use the smaller of the two loads. 4. To determine the concentric brace working load, divide the governing load (brace shoe or buckling load) by the desired safety factor. A 1.5 minimum safety factor is recommended for temporary wind bracing of concrete wall panels. Braces when used for other purposes or different types of applied loads may require higher safety factors. Safety factor shall be determined by the user

167 Meadow Burke Braces SUPER 5 AND 4 BRACE Meadow Burke's new Super 5 and Super 4 braces are 5 feet and 4 feet long, fixed-length braces with 18'' of adjustment for final plumbing. These braces have an ultimate strength of 16,050 lbs which is nearly times as strong as Super 3's with extensions attached. They are used to brace panels from 39 to 79 feet high without the need for secondary bracing. The Super 5 weighs 680 lbs and the Super 4 weighs 550 lbs Bracing Hardware

168 Meadow Burke Braces SUPER 3 BRACE The Super 3 Brace is a 3-foot long fixed-length brace with 18 inches of adjustment for final plumbing. The brace has an ultimate strength of 13,500 pounds, making it.4 times stronger as a Super Brace with 10 foot extension. It is used to brace panels from 30 to 50 feet high without the need for secondary bracing or Bi-pods. Brace weight: 75 lbs. There is a 10 foot extension available for the Super 3, which makes it 4 feet long and then weighs 400 pounds. At this length, the brace has an ultimate strength of 8,04 pounds and is used to brace panels up to 64 feet. By placing a 10 foot long extension at each end of the Super 3 brace, it is possible to obtain a 5 foot long brace. In this configuration the brace weighs 50 pounds and has an ultimate strength of 5,778 pounds. It is used to brace panels up to 75 feet high. 5 extensions are also available to obtain 37 and 47 long braces

169 Meadow Burke Braces SUPER BRACE Meadow Burke Super Brace combines lightweight with high strength for easy handling and solid support of precast panels. Because of its tested strength, fewer braces and inserts per panel are required. Super Brace comes in ft. (6.71 m) lengths. 5 and 10 ft. extensions are available that quickly and easily bolt onto the brace at the jobsite. Simply remove the swivel head from the Super Brace, slip the sleeved end of the extension onto the brace and bolt together. Then reattach the swivel head to the free end of the extension. Super Brace is easily adjusted for final plumbing of the panel. A predrilled hole near the foot of the brace accepts a scrap piece of rebar as a fine adjustment handle. Braces are normally set to provide 9 (9 mm) of adjustment in either direction for a total of 18 (457 mm) Brace weight: 136 lbs. (61.7 kg). 10 Extension weight: 88 lbs. (40 kg). 5 Extension weight: 5 lbs. (4 kg) Bracing Hardware

170 Meadow Burke Braces SUPER 17 BRACE The Super 17 Brace is a 17 long fixed length brace with 18 inches of adjustment for final plumbing. The brace has an ultimate strength of 13,000 lbs. The Super 17 can brace panels from 9 to 5 tall. Brace weight is 105 lbs. MB 8-14 BRACE This versatile, telescoping brace is adjustable from 8 to 14 lengths. It is best utilized in situations where a very short brace is required. Brace weight is 58 lbs

171 Item Number B75050 B75055 B75060 B7506 B75065 B75070 B7507 B75075 B75080 B7508 B75085 B75090 B7509 B75095 B75100 B75105 B75110 B751 B75115 B750 WORKING LOADS IN LBS. IN 500 PSI CONCRETE,.0:1 SAFETY FACTOR Conc. Thick. in inches 5 5-1/ 6 6-1/4 6-1/ 7 7-1/4 7-1/ 8 8-1/4 8-1/ 9 9-1/4 9-1/ / /4 11-1/ Face Tension 7,800 9,65 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 WORKING LOADS IN LBS. IN 500 PSI CONCRETE,.0:1 SAFETY FACTOR Face Shear 8,00 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 10,150 Coil Inserts Meadow Burke s Brace Inserts have been an industry standard for the past three decades. These solid bolted connections have proven the strength and security of this system on thousands of job sites around the country. For unshakable reliability the Meadow Burke Coil System is an excellent choice. B-75 WALL BRACE INSERT 3/4 diameter coil insert height is 1/ less than panel thickness. Available in 1/ increments from 5 through. 0.6 Dia. Clear plastic feet obscure insert on the back side of the panel. Yellow Easy-See Cap has antennae to make locating inserts quicker and easier. The minimum edge distance required to obtain the rated loads for face applications is inches. BII-75 INVERTED WALL BRACE INSERT 3/4 diameter coil insert - Available in size shown only. Item Number Conc. Thick. in inches Face Tension Face Shear 0.6 Dia. BII75 Inverted 9,65 10, /4 Clear plastic feet Yellow Easy-See Cap has antennae to make locating inserts quicker and easier Bracing Hardware

172 Insert Placement E-SEE CAPS HELP WORKMEN PROTECT, INSPECT, AND DETECT INSERTS Meadow Burke Inserts come equipped with distinctive, bright yellow E-See Caps. The shape of the cap will differ with the type of insert, but all of them have the easy-to-see yellow antennae. These locator antennae serve two purposes, 1.) they clearly signal the presence of the insert after concrete is poured,.) because the antennae are arranged in a circle or ellipse around the perimeter of the insert, they form a separate concrete plane which can be easily cracked and removed with minimum spalling of the surrounding concrete. Patching work is minimized. E-See cap antennae will not interfere with screeding, bull floating, or troweling. These highly flexible, polyethylene antennae merely flatten out during finishing work only to spring back up once finishing equipment has passed. Meadow Burke s resilient caps also protect the insert from seepage while creating a void for the easy entry of lifting equipment or bolts. Once their work is done, Meadow Burke s E-See Caps can be easily removed with a screw driver or other similar instrument. Locator antennae clearly indicate the presence of the insert after concrete is poured. E-See Caps are bight yellow to increase visibility. SPECIALLY DESIGNED BURKE INSERTS FACILITATE PLACEMENT Meadow Burke Inserts are designed for stability and economy. The inserts should be tied securely to the rebar mesh. Location of the inserts in the panel should correspond exactly to their position on the engineering drawing. If for some reason they cannot be placed in their exact location, contact your Meadow Burke representative or the Meadow Burke Engineering Center. Bracing inserts should not be placed in a position where the attachment of braces prior to lifting would interfere with erection hardware or rigging. They should be placed no closer than 1 ft. (305 mm) away from all edges or openings. It is important that concrete around the anchors be properly consolidated. Care should be taken to assure that the vibrator s head does not hit the surface of the floor. This may cause chipping, mechanical bonding, and surface imperfection. Once the concrete has begun to stiffen, the vibrators should avoid striking the reinforcing rods. Vibration of the rods at this stage may break the existing bond between the concrete and the rods. B-75 Patch Data Item Number Description B-75 Patch Unit Weight [lbs.] 0.05 lbs. 17

173 CB- COIL GRADE 5 COIL BOLT Product Code # 947 BIG-75 FLOOR SLAB INSERT 3/4 diameter coil insert - Available in size shown only. *Use of coil bolts other than the MB C Coil Bolt may result in loss of brace stability. Yellow Easy-See Cap has antennae to make locating inserts quicker and easier. 5 1/ 0.36 Dia. 9-1/ Allowable Load GROUNDED WALL BRACE INSERTS [BIG-75] 0 to 60 Item Number WORKING LOADS IN LBS. IN 500 PSI CONCRETE,.0:1 SAFETY FACTOR Min Conc. Thick. in inches Allowable Angle Allowable Load BIG75 5-1/ 0 to 60 9,470 M 5-1/ Bracing Hardware

174 MB SLAM ANCHOR BUILT FOR STRENGTH, SAFETY, SPEED The Precast construction industry has long awaited the arrival of the most heralded brace-to-floor connection solution in recent years. The MB Slam Anchor was designed to address the shortcomings of existing brace-to-floor connectors. STRENGTH The objective was simply to create a brace-to-floor connection that will handle the maximum applied brace loads with a single bolt. The MB Slam Anchor carries a 9,000 lbs. load with a to 1 safety factor. SIMPLICITY AND SAFETY We recognize that current brace-to-floor connections used in the field today can easily be improperly installed, resulting in serious safety hazards. Another objective with the Slam Anchor was to insure a virtually foolproof installation. SPEED We know time is money. And with crane and crew waiting, we know that speed of installation is paramount. NO TORQUE OR RETIGHTENING REQUIRED The unique expansion mechanism is not a threaded connection, and therefore does not have a torque requirement and does not need to be retightened. ECONOMICAL In addition to the savings in labor, the Slam Anchor is designed to be reusable. Only a small drop-in is expended at each use. We are confident that the Slam Anchor will be the brace-to-floor connection solution

175 DRILL HOLE - Determine the location of the brace shoe on the slab. - Using a roto hammer, drill a 7/8 hole in the slab. - Make sure that the hole is at least 6 deep or through the slab. - If the hole does not completely penetrate the slab, make sure to clean it out completely. - Screw Drop-in onto the end of the bolt, making sure to hand-tighten only. Do not over-tighten. DROP MB SLAM ANCHOR IN HOLE - Place bolt in the 7/8 hole and hammer until only the narrow (3/4") portion beneath the bolt head is visible. - Slide the brace shoe over the bolt. - Drive the bolt the rest of the way down. INSTALL SETTING PIN - Insert pin into the hole in the center of the bolt. - Place the specially designed MB SLAMMER setting tool over the pin and bolt, and pound the ram on the setting tool all the way down. A flush setting pin is assurance of a properly set anchor. TIGHTEN BOLT - Once the ram is driven all the way down, use the MB Slammer setting tool to check that the Slam Anchor is tightened down. - This should be anywhere from an 1/8th to 1/4th of a turn. Remove the setting tool. Eye protection should be worn during the installation of this product. Setting pin should only be set using the MB Slammer setting tool Bracing Hardware

176 MB BRACE BOLT MB Brace Bolt safely and economically secures precast braces to the slab without the inconvenience or uncertainty of cast-in-place inserts or expansion bolts. Pullout strength is equivalent to a cast-in-place insert without the problems of locating inserts and adjusting braces 1/ 30 mm while the crane and crew wait. Convenience combines with economy in this reusable system. Nothing is left in the slab or wasted. When bracing is no longer needed, simply disengage the 0 mm brace and remove bolt. The MB Brace Bolt can be used multiple times as long as the bolt continues to tighten up to the brace shoe but never more than 5 uses. Quality materials guarantee strength and durability. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1. Mark anchor location and drill a 0mm diameter straight hole at least 10 deep. Clean 7-3/4 Dual threads don t rely on expansion or displacement to generate strength. as much from the hole as possible by periodically lifting bit while drilling. The added depth is required to accommodate dust from drilling and thread cutting.. Turn bolt into the concrete to within 1 of the surface using a large 3/4 impact wrench with a 30mm socket. 3. Slide the Brace Shoe onto the bolt and continue tightening. NOTES 1. If it is necessary to remove the bolt and re-install it, hand thread the bolt to start it in the original threads. This way new threads will not be cut through the original ones.. The Brace Bolt does not rely on expansion or displacement to generate its strength and is, there fore, not dependent on torque applied during installation to set it. Once it is tight, it is set. Slab Bolt Loose Washer 3. It is not necessary to re-tighten the bolt after high winds unless it is visibly loose. Brace Shoe 4. The use of excessively worn or undersized drill bits may prevent the bolt from threading. 5. The use of oversized drill bits may result in incomplete threading and premature failure. 6. The use of under-powered drills +/or impact wrenches may slow or prevent proper installation. 0 mm Hole SLAB BRACE BOLT DATA Item Number Description Shear Safety Factor :1* Tension Safety Factor :1* Unit Weight [lbs.] MB Slab Brace Bolt 14,435 lbs. 8,950 lbs lbs. *Values for shear and tension in 3,000 psi standard weight concrete at 6 thick

177 DOG BONE BRACE CONNECTOR Meadow Burke is pleased to introduce the industry s first brace-to-dogbone connector. The Dog Bone Brace Connector is the first product of it s kind to connect a wall brace to a 4-ton Dog Bone Anchor. With the Dog Bone Brace Connector, erectors can securely and positively attach Meadow Burke wall braces to a wall panel through the use of a cast-in-concrete lifting anchor. The connector slides into the anchor void, and positions under the head of the dog bone in the same way a clutch is installed. The foot of the brace is positioned over the center of the shoe, aligning the center bolt holes. A 3/4" coil bolt (sold separately) is threaded into the Dog Bone Brace Connector. Once the bolt bottoms out, a preinstalled jam nut and washer is then tightened against the shoe. This connector is tested, safe, cost effective and easy to use. Dog Bone Brace Connector Dog Bone Features of the Dog Bone Brace Connector: Eliminates need to inventory drill-in anchors Reduce install time. No drill and hammer at each anchor location Designed for use on 4-ton Dog Bone Shoe has been tested and will withstand loads required for any wall brace The Dog Bone Brace Connector is reusable Go/No Go Gauge also available for this product to check bolt and shoe wear NOTE: Customer must verify the location of Dog Bone Anchor to be sufficient for use with the required brace locations prior to installation. Meadow Burke Brace Dog Bone Brace Connector Load Table 4 Ton DB-5 Ultimate Load Length (in) 3.75,500 PSI 6,500 3,500 PSI 7,900 5,000 PSI 9, ,700 9,100 10,900 Item Number Description Unit Weight 4567 Dog Bone Brace Connector 1. lbs ,400 11,700 13,500 11,00 13,500 13,500 13,400 13,500 13, ,500 13,500 13, ,500 13,500 13, Bracing Hardware

178 Meadow Brace Badger MB Brace Badger Helical Anchor System There are times in precast construction when conventional bracing to floor slabs is not desired. Until now your option has been to construct expensive and time consuming concrete deadmen. The Meadow Burke Brace Badger is revolutionizing precast construction by providing contractors with an economical and efficient alternative. MB BADGER ADVANTAGES INCLUDE: eliminates concrete deadmen environmentally friendly offers quick installation and removal the strongest brace anchor available verifiable load capacity in all soil conditions works with ALL Meadow Burke braces reusable PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS: The MB Brace Badger is pre-engineered for superior results in precast applications. It consists of three helix plates welded to a 1 1/" square bar shaft. Each helix plate is specially formed from 3/8" x 44 ksi new steel plate. Our shaft steel has a typical yield strength of 95 ksi, and a typical tensile strength of 130 ksi, making it the strongest helical anchor available in the industry! " OD x 3/8" Helix 10" OD x 3/8" Helix 8" OD x 3/8" Helix 1/4" typ 45 Cut 1-1/" x 1-1/" Square Bar Shaft '- 6" '- 0" 6" 7'- 0" 178

179 T F Capacity to Torque Ratio Helical anchor installation involves screwing the anchor into the ground and applying a constant downward force. The holding capacity of the anchor is proportionate to the final installation torque. The following equation can be used to determine holding capacity. Badger Capacity = K x T Where K = Torque constant T = Final installation torque The K value is reliant on the geometry of the helix pier. For helical anchors with square shaft dimensions less than ", a value of 10 is suggested by Hoyt and Clemence (1989). MB uses a value of 7 for an added saftey factor. This K value is applicable for all 1.50" square shaft anchors. Blade pitch per revolution, p The distance moved by the hub per revolution is equal to the pitch, p typically 3" Typical MB Brace Badger Installation Bracing Hardware

180 Soil Mechanics The capacity of the MB Brace Badger is the result of the strength of the surrounding soil because the loading force is transferred to the soil. There are typically two types of soils: cohesive and cohesionless. Cohesive soils are defined as soils whose internal angle of friction is approximately zero (Ø = 0) while cohesionless soils are those whose internal angle of friction is greater than zero (Ø > 0). Soil naturally tends to develop in layers or strata, each with individual strength characteristics, and the figure above illustrates this stratification. As the Badger is drilled into the ground, it will pass through different layers. Because each layer has different characteristics, different torque values will be observed as the anchor passes through each layer. During an ideal installation, the torque values will be constantly increasing, indicating the anchor is being inserted into more dense soil. If a drop in torque is recorded, it is most likely that a soft layer (such as soft clay) was found. The Badger must then be installed through the soft layer until a more dense soil (i.e. higher torque) is found. Soft Clay Dense Clay Dense Sand Depth Gravel Bedrock 180

181 Installation A variety of rotary hydraulic equipment can be used to install the MB Brace Badger including but not limited to: skidsteers, excavators, and boom mounted utility trucks. The installer should maintain a continuous downward pressure on the MB Brace Badger to avoid auguring during installation. Throughout the installation of each MB Brace Badger the torque is continuously monitored and recorded. There is a direct relationship between installation torque and Badger capacity. Continuous monitoring and recording of torque throughout installation gives a profile of the soil conditions. A 5' extension can be added to install the Badger deeper to reach the stronger soils and attain the required load capacity. After the Badger is installed, a Badger Connector is bolted to the top of the Badger. The Super Brace shoe is removed and the Doka rod of the Super Brace is bolted between the ears of the connector. To remove the Badger, simply reverse the hydraulic motor and back it out of the ground. It is ready for immediate inspection and reuse. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1) Installation is performed by a MB Brace Badger Systems trained installer. ) Using a hydraulic drive head, Brace Badgers (Item #58000) are installed to a torque of,00 ft-lbs. If the minimum required torque is not achieved with a single anchor, please contact Meadow Burke engineering for assistance. A 5' extensions (Item #580006) may be added until the torque minimum torque requirement is achieved. It is recommended that preliminary soil logs at the site be obtained to help predict project requirements. In softer soils with Standard Penetration Test (SPT) blow counts (N) less than 10, an extension may be required. Installation in rocky soils with blow counts (N) greater than 30 is not recommended. Also, frozen soils may require pre-auguring so that the anchor can reach below the frost line. 3) Maximum allowable installation torque is 7,000 ft-lbs. 4) Records of required installation torque for each Badger are required. 5) Badgers to be installed in-line with the axis of the brace (+/- 5º). 6) Welding, cutting, or any modification of the Badger or its components is prohibited. 7) MB Badger Connector (item #580004) must be used for brace connection. To connect to brace, remove brace shoe and reuse 5/8" bolt for connector. Connector to Badger requires one 3/4"Ø x 3 1/" grade 5 bolt. SAFETY NOTES 1) The contractor shall locate all the subsurface structures and utilities. Any subsurface structure or utility in the vicinity of the Badger locations shall be clearly marked. Horizontal Clearance of anchor from any subsurface structure or utility shall be no less than 5'-0" at the depth of the utility. Installation of Badgers underneath utilities or subsurface structures is strictly prohibited. ) Do not use damaged or worn Brace Badgers. Failure to inspect and replace damaged anchors may result in anchor failure. 3) The contractor is to undergo preventive measures to mitigate soil erosion adjacent to installed anchors. 4) Any changes resulting from actual installation conditions of the Badger requires that the contractor contact Meadow Burke Engineering for further assistance to deter mine adequacy of anchor system Bracing Hardware

182 MB BRACE BADGER CONNECTOR CORRECT CONNECTION MB Super Brace Remove the brace shoe. Use the approved MB Badger Connector (item #580004) to attach bracing to the MB Brace Badger. MB Badger Connector (item #580004) WRONG! DO NOT attach bracing to the MB Badger using the brace shoe. This connection is not approved by Meadow Burke. MB Brace Badger 18

183 Index by Product # Anchor Chuck - multiple use Burke Barrier Reflector Connector...5 Burke Lift System...13 Burke Precast Chemicals Big-75 Floor Slab Insert BII-75 Inverted Wall Brace Insert B-75 Wall Brace Insert B-75 Patch...17 C Coil Grade 5 Coil Bolt CB- Coil Bolt...96 CH-7 Strand Clamp CH-9 Strand Recess Plug CH-31 Debond Split Tubing CH-3 Debond Strand Snap CN-5 Coil Nut...94 CN-5 Coil Nut - Heavy...94 CN-33 Coil Nut - Super 150 Hi Strength CN-49 Eye Bolt...99 Concrete Repair Products CP- Coil Setting Plub - Plastic...96 CR-4 Coil Rod...95 CR-4 Coil Rod - Hi-Strength CR-5 Coil Rod - Super 150 Hi-Strength CX- Coil Loop Insert - Straight...87 CX-4 Coil Loop Insert - Flared...87 CX-6 Coil Loop Insert - Double Flared...88 CX-8 Criss-Cross Insert - Flared...88 CX-9 Criss-Cross Coil Insert - Straight...89 CX-4 Thin Slab Coil Insert...89 CX-8 Coil Wingnut Insert...90 CX-41 Coil Lifting Insert - Single...90 CX-4 Coil Lifting Insert - Double...91 CX-43 Edge Lift Insert - Single...91 CX-44 Edge Lift Insert - Double...9 CX-45 Edge Pickup Insert - Single...9 CX-46 Edge Pickup Insert - Double...93 CX-47 Coil Locator Plug...98 CX-51 Open Coil Insert...93 CW-Flat Washer...95 Dogbone Shoe DB-1 Dogbone Lifting Clutch...7 DB- MB Dogbone Lifting Body Chain Link...73 DB-3 MB Dogbone Lifting Body Eye Link...74 DB-5 MB Dogbone Recess Former...75 DB-6 MB Dogbone Thread/Bolt Plate...75 DB-10 MB Dogbone Recess Former-Steel...75 DB-11 MB Dogbone Recess Grommet...75 DB-15 MB Dogbone Recess Former Magnetic...76 DB-16 MB Dogbone Recess Former Magnetic...76 DB-18 MB Dogbone Recess Former Narrow w/stud...76 DB-19 MB Dogbone Recess Former Narrow w/threaded Hole...76 DB- MB Dogbone Recess Former Narrow w/inside Threads...76 DB-4 MB Dogbone Threaded Nut...77 DB-5 MB Dogbone Stud...77 DB-6 MB Dogbone Wing Nut...77 DB-31 MB Dogbone Shear Bar - Anchor...77 DB-33 MB Dogbone Shear Bar - Cup...77 DB-5 MB Dogbone Anchor...65 DB-5 Dogbone Anchor Edge Lift...66 DB-53 MB Dogbone Eye Anchor...70 DB-60 Dogbone Rebar Reinforcing Pin...71 Double Tee 17 & 0 KIP Anchor...51 DS-5 Dovetail Anchor Slot...5 DT-1 Pushdown DT-6 Pushdown DT-31 Hold Down Anchor DT-35 Hold Down Anchor E-See Cap...17 Epoxy Products Erector Connector FC-17 Cap - Plastic Ferrule FC-18 Plug - Plastic NC Thread FC--19 Tie Hole Plug FG-7 Form Gasket Form Release Agents FS- Ferrule Insert - Standard FX- Ferrule Insert - Straight Loop FX-5 Ferrule Insert - Loop FX-14 Ferrule Insert - Thin Slab FX-16 Ferrule Insert - Thin Slab Strut FX-19 Ferrule Insert - Wing FX-51 Ferrule Insert - Open Halfen Panel Restraint Anchor Halfen Panel Restraint Anchor Near Edge Halfen Panel Restraint Anchor Insulated Halfen Panel Restraint Anchor Tee Bolt...0 Halfen Panel Restraint Anchor Spring Nut...0 Halfen Panel Restraint Anchor Strap...1 Halfen Spot Insert... Halfen Spot Insert Tee Bolt... Halfen Spot Insert Locking Plate...3 Halfen Double-Tee Stem Anchor...3 Hook-Lift Anchor...83 Hook-Lift Edge Anchor...83 Lift-It Plate...99 LP-11 Lift Plate - Swivel...97 LP-0 Lift Plate - Double Swivel...97 LP- Lift Plate - Edge...98 LP-44 Lift Plate - Angle...98 MB Cable Lift Loop + Plus System...84 MB Brace Badger Helical Anchor MB Brace Badger Connector...18 MB Brute MB Brace Bolt MB DogBone w Dispos. Recess Member...78 MB Slam Anchor MB Super Bolt MB-7 Shelf Insert Askew Head Bolt...7 MB 8-14 Brace MN-7 Shelf Insert Hex Nut...7 MW-7 Shelf Insert Round Washer...7 MS-7 Shelf Insert Shim Washer...7 MX-3 Hi-Tensile Insert MX-5 Y Insert MX-7 Shelf Insert...6 MX-7L Shelf Insert - Long...6 MX-14 Adjustable Insert...8 MX-5 Precast Concrete Insert MX-8 Plug - Metal NC Thread MX-5 Burke Slot Insert Stud Strap...6 MX-55 Burke Slot Insert...5 PC-11 Threaded Insert Prestress Chuck Tools & Accessories Prestress Strand Hold Downs Prestress Strand Hold Downs - 0K & 40K Prestress Strand Hold Downs - 60K PTJ-5S Stressing Jack Rapid Lift Holding Plate...57 Rapid Lift Precast Patch...60 Rapid Lift Sealing Cover...60 Rapid-Lok RL- One Ton Erection Anchor...9 RL-3 Tech Erection Anchor...8 RL-4 Rapid Lift Tech Erection Anchor with Shear Plate...3 RL-6 Erection Anchor...33 RL-7 Erection Anchor with Shear Plate...34 RL-9 45º Tech Erection Anchor...35 RL-10 Erection Head Anchor...35 RL-11 Erection Head Anchor with Plate...36 RL-14 Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor...46 RL-15 Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor...47 RL-16 Sandwich Panel Erection Anchor with plate...48 RL-1 Flat Foot Anchor...37 RL- Two Hole Anchor...38 RL-3 Spread Anchor...39 RL-4 Plate Anchor...4 RL-5 Tech Anchor...43 RL-31 Shear Bar...44 RL-3 Tension Bar...44 RL-6 T-Bar Anchor...45 RL-9 T-Bar Anchor Assembly...45 RL-35 Ring Clutch...5 RL-36 Ring Clutch Bolt...54 RL-38 Cable Ring Clutch...53 RL-39 Cable Ring Clutch...53 RL-40 Recess Member - Hole...55 RL-45 Recess Member - 4 Hole...55 RL-46 Holding Plate...53 RL-47 L-Rod Style...54 RL-48 Wing Nut Style Bolt...54 RL-49 Bayonet Style Bolt...54 RL-50 Recess Member - Disposable...5 RL-53 Recess Member - Disposalbe...5 RL-55 Recess Member - Steel...55 RL-57 Steel Recess Member Wedge...55 RL-58 Wing Nut Coil Bolt...60 RL-59 Steel Recess Member Foam Strip...59 RL-60 Plate Anchor Base...4 RL-61 Double-T Anchor...50 RL-6 Double-T Anchor...49 RL-65 Double-T Void...49 RL-67 L-Rod Coil Bolt...60 RL-71 Chain Guard RL-73 Panel Pad RL-75 Shims - Standard RL-76 Shims - Super RL-77 Shims - Super Pak Splice Chuck - one time use Stud Extender Strand Chuck - one time use Strand Hold Down 0K Strand Hold Down 40K Strand Hold Down 60K Super 17 Brace Super Brace Super 3 Brace Super 5 & 4 Brace Super-Lift III Ring Clutch...54 Sure-Lock Splice Chuck - multiple use...14 Sure-Lock Strand Chuck - multiple use...14 V-Anchor Lifting System...76 Welded Wire Girder

184 Innovating Concrete Construction SERVICE & DISTRIBUTION CENTERS CORPORATE ArizonA Phoenix 501 N. 37th Dr. Suite Phoenix, AZ (60) (800) FAX: (60) CAliforniA AnAheim 3611 East La Palma Ave. Suite A Anaheim, CA 9806 (714) (800) FAX: (714) florida TAmPA 835 Overpass Rd. Tampa, FL (813) (800) FAX: (877) GeorGiA ATlAnTA 3080 N. Lanier Parkway Decatur, GA (404) (800) FAX: (404) illinois ChiCAGo (513) (866) fax: (877) new JerSey PAliSAdeS PArk 69 Commercial Ave. Palisades Park, NJ (01) (800) FAX: (01) north CArolinA ChArloTTe 3401-A Woodpark Blvd. Charlotte NC 806 (704) (800) FAX: (704) oregon PorTlAnd 155 SE Hazel Dell Way Canby, OR (888) FAX: (503) PennSylvAniA hazelton 565 Oak Ridge Road Hazel Township, PA (800) TexAS SAn AnTonio 851 FM 1976 Converse TX (10) (800) FAX: (10) TexAS ft. worth 7000 Will Rogers Blvd. Ft. Worth, TX (817) (800) FAX: (817) washington Auburn 3416 B Street, Suite B Auburn, WA (877) FAX: (877) TAmPA 6467 S Falkenburg Road Riverview, FL (877) engineering (866) MB0517 MeadowBurke